Mitsubishi Electric MELSEC iQ-R-R00CPU Скачать руководство пользователя страница 1017

Страница: 1017 / 1028

1015

REAL

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

Real constant (E)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

Real number

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

Redundant function module

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Redundant system

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Refresh

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

Refresh data register (RD)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

Refresh memory

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Refresh memory setting

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

Remote head module

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Remote operation

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Remote password

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

Remote RESET

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Remote RUN

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Remote STOP

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Reserved area for online change

. . . . . . . . . . . 117

Resetting counters

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

Retentive timer

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374,3 75

Retentive timer (ST)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

RETENTIVETIMER

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374,3 75

RnCPU

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

RnENCPU

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

RnENCPU (CPU part)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

RnENCPU (network part)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

RUN state

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

RUN-PAUSE contacts

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Safety communication function

. . . . . . . . . . . . . 543

Safety communications

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Safety control

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Safety counter

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554,55 7,67 5,6 78

Safety CPU

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Safety cycle processing

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Safety cycle time

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36,52 7,5 82

Safety data identify check

. . . . . . . . . . . . . 543,6 58

Safety data register

. . . . . . . . . . . 554,55 7,67 5,6 78

Safety device

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675

Safety devices

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36,5 54

Safety diagnostic function

. . . . . . . . . . . . . 542,6 58

Safety function module

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Safety global device

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558,6 80

Safety global label

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559,6 81

Safety input

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554,55 5,67 5,6 76

Safety internal relay

. . . . . . . . . . 554,55 5,67 5,6 76

Safety link register

. . . . . . . . . . . 554,55 7,67 5,6 78

Safety link relay

. . . . . . . . . . . . . 554,55 5,67 5,6 76

Safety local device

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558,6 80

Safety local label

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559,6 81

SAFETY MODE

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537,5 66

SAFETY MODE (wait-for-restart)

. . . . . . . . 537,5 66

Safety operation mode

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537,5 66

Safety output

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554,55 5,67 5,6 76

Safety program

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36,52 5,5 80

Safety programmable controller

. . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Safety retentive timer

. . . . . . . . . . 554,55 6,67 5,6 77

Safety special register

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554,6 75

Safety special relay

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554,6 75

Safety system device

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675

Safety system devices

. . . . . . . . . . . . 554,55 7,6 79

Safety timer

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554,55 6,67 5,6 77

Safety user device

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675,6 76

Safety user devices

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554,5 55

Saving/restoring of the file register (R) block
number

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78

Saving/restoring of the index register (Z, LZ)

. . . . .79

Scan execution type program

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54

Scan monitoring function

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125

Scan time

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

Scan time monitoring time

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125

Scan time monitoring time setting

. . . . . . . . . . . .125

SD memory card

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99

Security function

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318

Security key authentication

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318

Separate mode

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

Serial number method

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357

Setting RUN-PAUSE contacts

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .143

Setting time zone

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110

SFC block device (BL)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365

SFC transition device (TR)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365

Shift JIS

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374

Signal flow memory

. . . . . . . .99,46 1,5 06,6 29,6 88

SIL2 function module

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

SIL2 mode

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

SIL2 Process CPU

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

Single-precision real number

. . . . . . . . . . . 374,4 02

Special register (SD)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349

Special relay (SM)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349

Stack file

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190

Standard communications

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

Standard control

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

Standard CPU

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

Standard device

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

Standard program

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

Standard programmable controller

. . . . . . . . . . . .36

Standard/safety shared label

. . . . . . . . .35,5 59,6 81

Standby system

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

Standby type program

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63

Station sub ID number

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

Step relay (S)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337

STOP state

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87

Storage file

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191

STRING

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374

String

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374

String [Unicode]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374

Structure

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375,3 81

Structure array

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382

Subroutine call instruction

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66

System A

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

System B

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

System clock

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114

System consistency check

. . . . . . . . . . . . . 475,6 42

System device

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348

System label

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372

System parameters

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .934

System switching

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441,6 09

TEST MODE

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537,5 66

The other system

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

TIME

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374

Time

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374

Time setting

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108

Time zone

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110

TIMER

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374,3 75

Timer

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374,3 75

Timer (T)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338

Timer current value

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340

«
...
1015
1016
1017
1018
1019
...
»

Содержание MELSEC iQ-R-R00CPU

Страница 1: ...lication R00CPU R01CPU R02CPU R04CPU R04ENCPU R08CPU R08ENCPU R08PCPU R08PSFCPU R08SFCPU R16CPU R16ENCPU R16PCPU R16PSFCPU R16SFCPU R32CPU R32ENCPU R32PCPU R32PSFCPU R32SFCPU R120CPU R120ENCPU R120PCPU R120PSFCPU R120SFCPU R6RFM R6PSFM R6SFM ...

Страница 2: ......

Страница 3: ...NG and CAUTION Under some circumstances failure to observe the precautions given under CAUTION may lead to serious consequences Observe the precautions of both levels because they are important for personal and system safety Make sure that the end users read this manual and then keep the manual in a safe place for future reference WARNING Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous condi...

Страница 4: ...SEC iQ R Module Configuration Manual 4 Outputs may remain on or off due to a failure of a component such as a relay and transistor in an output circuit Configure an external circuit for monitoring output signals that could cause a serious accident In an output circuit when a load current exceeding the rated current or an overcurrent caused by a load short circuit flows for a long time it may cause...

Страница 5: ...cts a fault in the external power supply or itself it turns off all outputs in the safety system Configure an external circuit to ensure that the power source of a hazard is shut off by turning off the outputs Failure to do so may result in an accident Configure short current protection circuits for safety relays and protection circuits such as a fuse and breaker external to the programmable contr...

Страница 6: ...s such as a fuse and breaker external to the safety programmable controller When a load current exceeding the rated current or an overcurrent caused by a load short circuit flows the CC Link IE Field Network remote I O module with safety functions detects an error and turns off all outputs Note that if the overcurrent state continues for a long time it may cause smoke and fire To prevent this conf...

Страница 7: ... configure an interlock circuit in the program to ensure that the entire system will operate safely Failure to do so may result in an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction Outputs may remain on or off due to a failure of the CC Link IE Field Network remote I O module with safety functions Configure an external circuit for monitoring output signals that could cause a serious accident P...

Страница 8: ... RUN STOP functions select Do Not Open by Program for Opening Method of Module Parameter If Open by Program is selected an execution of the remote STOP function causes the communication line to close Consequently the CPU module cannot reopen the line and external devices cannot execute the remote RUN function Precautions for using SIL2 Process CPUs Do not install the wiring of external devices or ...

Страница 9: ...n using an SD memory card fully insert it into the SD memory card slot Check that it is inserted completely Poor contact may cause malfunction Securely insert an extended SRAM cassette or a battery less option cassette into the cassette connector of the CPU module After insertion close the cassette cover and check that the cassette is inserted completely Poor contact may cause malfunction Do not d...

Страница 10: ... so may result in electric shock or cause the module to fail or malfunction After installation and wiring attach a blank cover module RG60 to each empty slot and an included extension connector protective cover to the unused extension cable connector before powering on the system for operation Failure to do so may result in electric shock ...

Страница 11: ...tance of 100mm or more between them Failure to do so may result in malfunction due to noise Place the cables in a duct or clamp them If not dangling cable may swing or inadvertently be pulled resulting in damage to the module or cables or malfunction due to poor contact Do not clamp the extension cables with the jacket stripped Doing so may change the characteristics of the cables resulting in mal...

Страница 12: ...ual For Ethernet cables to be used in the system select the ones that meet the specifications in the user s manual for the module used If not normal data transmission is not guaranteed Precautions for using redundant function modules For tracking cables to be used in the system select the ones that meet the specifications in the MELSEC iQ R CPU Module User s Manual Startup If not normal data trans...

Страница 13: ...ff the external power supply all phases used in the system before mounting or removing the module Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction Tighten the screws within the specified torque range Undertightening can cause drop of the component or wire short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction After ...

Страница 14: ...f programs depending on operation conditions Fully understand the precautions described in GX Works3 Operating Manual before performing the operation CAUTION When changing data and operating status and modifying program of the running programmable controller from an external device such as a personal computer connected to an intelligent function module read relevant manuals carefully and ensure th...

Страница 15: ... The halogens such as fluorine chlorine bromine and iodine which are contained in a fumigant used for disinfection and pest control of wood packaging materials may cause failure of the product Prevent the entry of fumigant residues into the product or consider other methods such as heat treatment instead of fumigation The disinfection and pest control measures must be applied to unprocessed raw wo...

Страница 16: ...ardous Materials or Chemicals Mining and Drilling and or other applications where there is a significant risk of injury to the public or property Notwithstanding the above restrictions Mitsubishi may in its sole discretion authorize use of the PRODUCT in one or more of the Prohibited Applications provided that the usage of the PRODUCT is limited only for the specific applications agreed to by Mits...

Страница 17: ...or damages that could have been prevented by compliance with any applicable safety standard regulation or law 2 MELCO prohibits the use of Products with or in any application involving and MELCO shall not be liable for a default a liability for defect warranty a quality assurance negligence or other tort and a product liability in these applications a power plants b trains railway systems airplane...

Страница 18: ...l to an actual system ensure the applicability and confirm that it will not cause system control problems Please make sure that the end users read this manual Relevant products When using the R00CPU R01CPU and R02CPU replace terms of some LEDs as follows to read this manual PROGRAM RUN LED P RUN LED CARD READY LED C RDY LED CARD ACCESS LED C ACS LED FUNCTION LED FUNC LED Item Model CPU module R00C...

Страница 19: ... Program Execution Type 53 Initial execution type program 53 Scan execution type program 54 Fixed scan execution type program 54 Event execution type program 59 Standby type program 63 Execution type change 64 Group setting for refresh 65 1 6 Subroutine Program 66 1 7 Interrupt Program 67 Interrupt period setting 77 Interrupt enabled during instruction execution 77 Processing at interrupt program ...

Страница 20: ...ving Time Function 111 Daylight saving time setting 111 Timing of daylight saving time adjustment 112 Daylight saving time function operation check 113 Operation of other functions using clock data during daylight saving time 113 Precautions 113 4 4 System Clock 114 Special relay used for system clock 114 Special register used for system clock 114 CHAPTER 5 WRITING DATA TO THE CPU MODULE 115 5 1 W...

Страница 21: ...HAPTER 8 BOOT OPERATION 144 8 1 Boot Operation Procedure 144 8 2 Specifiable File Types 145 8 3 Allowed Maximum Number of Boot Files 145 8 4 Configuring the Boot Setting 146 8 5 Operation When Security Functions Are Enabled 147 When a security key is set 147 When a file password is set 147 8 6 Precautions 147 CHAPTER 9 MONITOR FUNCTION 148 9 1 Real Time Monitor Function 148 CHAPTER 10 TEST FUNCTIO...

Страница 22: ... 11 15 Special Relay and Special Register Used by the Data Logging Function 208 11 16 Precautions to Take When Using the Data Logging Function 209 CHAPTER 12 DEBUG FUNCTION 221 12 1 Memory Dump Function 221 Object data 222 Trigger condition 222 Procedure for memory dump 224 Flow of data collection 225 Memory dump file 226 States of the memory dump function 227 Sizes of files used for the memory du...

Страница 23: ... group I O Fetch 289 Accessing controlled module 289 Accessing non controlled module 289 16 2 Operation Settings 291 Stop setting 291 Synchronous startup setting 292 Clock data 295 16 3 Multiple CPU Parameter Checking 296 16 4 Data Communication Between CPU Modules 297 Memory to be used 297 Fixed scan communication setting 302 Error detection setting 302 Module by module data guarantee 303 Communi...

Страница 24: ...7 Link special register SW 347 21 4 System Device 348 Function device FX FY FD 348 Special relay SM 349 Special register SD 349 21 5 Link Direct Device 349 Specification method 349 Specification range 350 Difference from link refresh 350 21 6 Module Access Device 351 Precautions 352 21 7 CPU Buffer Memory Access Device 352 Specification method 352 21 8 Index Register Z LZ 353 16 bit index modifica...

Страница 25: ...abels 372 22 3 Classes 373 22 4 Data Types 374 22 5 Arrays 377 22 6 Structures 381 22 7 Label Access Setting from External Device 383 Configuration procedure 384 Label communication data storage location and operation at the time of each setting operation 384 File operation 384 22 8 Precautions 385 CHAPTER 23 LATCH FUNCTION 387 23 1 Latch with Battery 387 Types of latch 387 Applicable devices and ...

Страница 26: ...mmunication error has occurred 413 When starting up the previous control system as the control system 418 26 8 State Transition of the Redundant System 420 CHAPTER 27 PROCEDURE FOR STARTING UP A REDUNDANT SYSTEM 422 27 1 Overview 422 Starting up both systems at a time 422 Starting up the systems one by one 424 Precautions on starting up the system when the data logging function is used 427 27 2 Wi...

Страница 27: ...le Communication Test 487 Execution procedure of the module communication test 487 28 9 Constant Scan 488 28 10 Online Change 489 28 11 RAS Function 490 Clearing errors on the standby system CPU module from the control system CPU module 490 28 12 Remote Operation 491 Remote RUN remote STOP remote PAUSE 491 Remote RESET 492 Precautions 492 28 13 Boot Operation 493 28 14 External Input Output Forced...

Страница 28: ... CHAPTER 30 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION FOR A REDUNDANT SYSTEM 516 30 1 Module Replacement in the Redundant System 516 Replacing a CPU module 517 Replacing a power supply module 519 Replacing a redundant power supply module 519 Replacing a redundant function module 520 Replacing I O modules 520 Replacing a network module 521 Replacing a main base unit 521 PART 5 WHEN USING THE SAFETY CPU CHAPTER 31...

Страница 29: ...unctions 550 Self diagnostic function 550 Error clear 551 CHAPTER 34 SAFETY DEVICES SAFETY LABELS AND CONSTANTS 554 34 1 Safety Devices 554 List of safety devices 554 Safety user devices 555 Safety system devices 557 34 2 Safety Global Devices 558 34 3 Safety Local Devices 558 34 4 Safety Label 559 Safety label types 559 Classes 561 Data types 562 Structures 562 34 5 Constants 562 PART 6 WHEN USIN...

Страница 30: ...e power supply modules in a system using the SIL2 Process CPU 598 36 3 Creating a Project 599 36 4 Connecting a Personal Computer and a CPU Module 600 36 5 System A B Settings 601 36 6 Writing Data to the Programmable Controller 603 36 7 Monitoring the Program 604 CHAPTER 37 FUNCTIONS 605 37 1 System Switching 609 System switching method 609 Operation at system switching 614 Execution availability...

Страница 31: ...a 665 Setting method 667 37 16 RAS Functions 669 Self diagnostic function 669 Error clear 671 Clearing errors on the standby system CPU module from the control system CPU module 673 37 17 SLMP Communications 674 CHAPTER 38 SAFETY DEVICES SAFETY LABELS AND CONSTANTS 675 38 1 Safety Devices 675 List of safety devices 675 Safety user devices 676 Safety system devices 679 38 2 Safety Global Devices 68...

Страница 32: ...en error occurs 703 How to clear errors 703 List of error codes 703 Appendix 2 Event List 788 How to read the event list 788 Event list 790 Appendix 3 Troubleshooting by Symptom 798 When the POWER LED of the power supply module turns off 798 When the READY LED of the CPU module turns off 798 When an error has occurred in a redundant function module 799 When an error has occurred in a SIL2 function...

Страница 33: ...ogging function 862 CPU module data backup restoration function 864 Data backup restoration function of iQ Sensor Solution 864 Interrupt pointer mask pattern 868 User authentication function 868 Memory dump function 869 Real time monitor function 869 Debug function 869 CPU module database access function 870 Ethernet function 871 CC Link IE Field Network Basic function 873 Online module change fun...

Страница 34: ...tails of the Device Label Access Service Processing Setting 937 Target list 937 Operation details 938 Appendix 12Program Restoration Information Write Selection 942 Checking the program restoration information write status 942 Precautions 944 Appendix 13How to Use CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool 945 System configuration 945 Specifications 948 Data logging procedure 960 Menu items and setting...

Страница 35: ...ore operation and troubleshooting of the CPU module Print book e Manual PDF MELSEC iQ R Ethernet User s Manual Application SH 081257ENG Functions parameter settings programming troubleshooting I O signals and buffer memory of Ethernet Print book e Manual PDF MELSEC iQ R Programming Manual Program Design SH 081265ENG Program specifications ladder ST FBD LD and SFC programs e Manual PDF MELSEC iQ R ...

Страница 36: ...he following modules when the Ethernet function is used RJ71EN71 CPU module Global label A label that is valid for all the program data when multiple program data are created in the project There are two types of global label a module specific label module label which is generated automatically by GX Works3 and an optional label which can be created for any specified device GX LogViewer Software t...

Страница 37: ...he Safety CPU Separate mode A mode for system maintenance in a redundant system This mode can maintain a redundant system without stopping control while the system is running Signal flow The execution status that the last time an operation of a program or an FB is executed in each step SIL2 function module Another name for the R6PSFM This module is used with a SIL2 Process CPU as a pair and perfor...

Страница 38: ...the Safety CPU safety function module CC Link IE Field Network remote I O module with safety functions Standard communications Communications other than safety communications such as cyclic transmission and transient transmission of CC Link IE Field Network Standard control Machine control by standard programs and standard data communications Modules other than the safety programmable controller h...

Страница 39: ...37 PART 1 PART 1 CPU MODULE OPERATION This part consists of the following chapters 1 RUNNING A PROGRAM 2 CPU MODULE OPERATION PROCESSING 3 MEMORY CONFIGURATION OF THE CPU MODULE ...

Страница 40: ...abled and the status of the SD memory card is as follows the initial processing when powered on or switched to RUN takes time and thus the CPU module may take time to respond to the peripheral A large number of files is stored in the SD memory card The SD memory card is close to the end of life or it has reached the end of life Item Initial processing Initial processing when switched to RUN Bootin...

Страница 41: ...processing The CPU module performs the following processing Network module link refresh Link refresh of CC Link IE Field Network Basic Intelligent function module refresh Instruction end processing including dedicated instruction for the module Device latch processing The device latch processing is a kind of service processing such as read and write of devices labels and program access files Page ...

Страница 42: ... time See below Values stored in SD518 Initial Scan Time and SD519 Initial Scan Time Program List Monitor GX Works3 Operating Manual Initial scan time monitoring Monitoring is performed with the initial scan time monitoring time Page 125 Scan time monitoring time setting Precautions on the initial scan time monitoring time Set the initial scan time monitoring time longer than the execution time of...

Страница 43: ... constant scan must be a value that satisfies the relational expression below Watchdog timer setting time Constant scan setting time Maximum scan time of the program If the maximum scan time of the program is longer than the constant scan setting time it is assumed as an error to ignore the constant scan and the scan time of the program is applied Item Description Setting range Default Constant Sc...

Страница 44: ...stant scan may increase by the program execution time of the interrupt factor Page 42 Precautions Precautions Processing of the program is stopped during the waiting time from the time the END processing is completed for the program until the next scan starts If any of the following processing requests is received during the waiting time the corresponding processing is executed Interrupt program F...

Страница 45: ...ication responses and the extension of scan time and adjust the service processing environment according to the system by methods such as setting a longer time for the device label access service processing or changing the parameter settings of peripherals so that the timeout time becomes longer For functions to which the device label access service processing setting can be applied refer to the l...

Страница 46: ...ssing Counts Execute END Processing between Programs Execute the Process as Scan Time Proceeds Rate Set the ratio of the device label access service processing to execute during a single scan when Execute the Process as Scan Time Proceeds is enabled The device label access service processing time is determined based on the scan time 1 to 99 unit 1 10 Time Set the device label access service proces...

Страница 47: ...cesses one request during the END processing and processes the remaining requests during the wait time for the next constant scan Set constant scan setting time considering the time required for the device label access service processing to execute Item Scan performance Device label access service process performance Inter program monitoring 5 Application Increase 1 Stability 2 Response time 3 Sta...

Страница 48: ...monitoring is performed in the situation where a device value is processed across programs values of ongoing operation may be read out 1 Also when Use File Register of Each Program is enabled and monitoring is performed for the file registers unintended data may be obtained GX Works3 Operating Manual 1 Because the timing of monitoring during execution of a program or the END processing cannot be s...

Страница 49: ...elays Refresh mode The CPU module performs I O processing collectively at a specified timing The following table lists the refresh timing which can be specified Page 48 Refresh mode 1 There are modules which performs the refresh processing at a specified END processing rather than at every END processing User s manual for the module used Direct mode The CPU module performs I O processing when each...

Страница 50: ...ata from an external device using SLMP Item Description Input refresh At a specified timing at END instruction execution or before specified program execution input data are collectively read out from the input modules 1 the OR processing with the engineering tool input area and remote input refresh area is executed and then the data are stored in the input X device memory Output refresh At a spec...

Страница 51: ... to the status change in the input module delays for two scans maximum depending on the on timing of an external contact Example A program that turns on the output Y5E when the input X5 turns on Y5E turns on the earliest Y5E turns on the latest Execution of an input contact instruction Input data in the input X device memory 3 are read out and the program is executed Execution of an output contact...

Страница 52: ...using SLMP Item Description Execution of an input contact instruction The OR processing is executed with the input information of the input module 1 and the input data of the engineering tool input area 2 or remote input refresh area The result is stored in the input X device memory and is used as input data 3 to execute the program Execution of an output contact instruction Output data in the out...

Страница 53: ...Example A program that turns on the output DY5E when the input DX5 turns on Y5E turns on the earliest Y5E turns on the latest 55 DX5 DY5E OFF ON 0 55 56 OFF ON OFF ON Delay time External contact DX5 External contact DY5E External load Devices in the CPU module OFF ON 0 55 56 OFF ON OFF ON END 0 55 56 External contact DX5 External contact DY5E External load Devices in the CPU module Delay time maxi...

Страница 54: ...gram Execution Type Page 64 Execution type change Programs with the same execution type are executed according to the execution sequence settings STOP RUN Initial processing Does an initial execution type program exist Does not exist Exists I O refresh Scan execution type program END processing I O refresh Initial execution type program Standby type program Fixed scan execution type program Event ...

Страница 55: ...grams finish execution 1 The sum of the initial execution type program execution time and END processing time is the initial scan time Precautions The following lists the precautions for the initial execution type programs Restrictions on program creation In the initial execution type program do not use an instruction which requires several scans to complete i e an instruction with a completion de...

Страница 56: ...ecution time for these programs is also included Fixed scan execution type program An interrupt program which is executed at a specified time interval Differently from the normal interrupt program this type of program does not require the interrupt pointer I and the IRET instruction and is executed for each program file unit To execute a fixed scan execution type program the EI instruction must be...

Страница 57: ...Setting window 2 Select the program name and set the execution type to Fixed Scan 3 Click Detailed Setting Information Fixed Scan Execution Type Detailed Setting window 4 Set the fixed scan interval Item Description Setting range Default Specified Time Intervals Sets the fixed scan interval to execute the fixed scan execution type program When ms is selected 0 5 to 60000ms in increments of 0 5ms W...

Страница 58: ... satisfied while the interrupt is disabled by the system The program is executed according to the fixed scan execution mode setting If an interrupt factor occurs during link refresh The link refresh is suspended and the fixed scan execution type program is executed Even while the station based block data assurance is enabled for cyclic data during refresh of such links as CC Link IE Field Network ...

Страница 59: ... which occurs while the interrupt is disabled by the DI instruction is excluded from the fixed scan execution mode target Operation in the fixed scan execution mode This section describes the operation which can be performed in the fixed scan execution mode Execution Count Takes Priority The program is executed for all the pending number of executions so that it can be executed the same number of ...

Страница 60: ...xample if there are fixed scan execution type programs with 2ms 4ms and 12ms scan periods the delay limit value behind a cycle is 2ms For fixed scan interrupts I28 to I31 I48 I49 using the internal timer of the CPU module The value is fixed to the same value as the fixed scan interval For example if the periods are I28 100ms and I29 20ms the delay limit value behind a cycle is 100ms for I28 and 20...

Страница 61: ...tion interrupt pointers and the IRET instruction within scan execution type programs Interrupt pointers I which can be specified are I0 to I15 I28 to I31 I44 I45 I48 I49 I50 to I1023 Execution conditions for the event execution type program which is triggered by interrupt occurred by the interrupt pointer I are the same as those for general interrupt programs Page 68 Operation upon occurrence of a...

Страница 62: ...trigger execution condition of the event execution type program is not met Set Clear Output and Current Value of Timer to Clear when using the timer T and the retentive timer ST Page 62 Trigger setting Note that if the above parameter is set the use of the long timer LT and the long retentive timer LST is limited to the same as that of the timer T and the retentive timer ST They do not measure tim...

Страница 63: ...s Even though Clear Output and Current Value of Timer is set to Clear in the CPU parameters the output value and the current value of the timer are not cleared if the scan time is longer than the value set to Passing Time To measure time when the trigger type is set to Passing Time use the long timer LT and the long retentive timer LST 1 After the specified time elapses the event execution type pr...

Страница 64: ...the trigger I0 to I15 I28 to I31 I44 I45 I48 1 I49 1 I50 to I1023 ON of Bit Data TRUE Sets the device used as the trigger Page 60 Bit data ON TRUE Clear Output and Current Value of Timer Sets that the current values of the output Y timer T and long timer LT used in this program are cleared at the execution turn of the event execution type program that comes after the specified bit data is OFF Do N...

Страница 65: ...systems to use them only when necessary For example a program set in advance as the standby type with a parameter can be changed to scan execution type and executed Page 64 Using an instruction Execution method The standby type program is executed as follows Create a subroutine program and interrupt program within the standby type program and then call them when an interrupt occurs or by specifyin...

Страница 66: ...tion executed last For details on operation if an SFC program is specified refer to the following MELSEC iQ R Programming Manual Program Design Program Setting window 1 Click Detailed Setting on the Program Setting window Detailed Setting window 2 For each program select the execution type in Type of Execution Type Execution type before change Execution instruction PSCAN PSTOP POFF Initial Switche...

Страница 67: ...tailed Setting Window Displayed items When the specified group number is not set in the refresh settings of each module the program is executed but the refresh of the relevant group number is not executed Refresh setting of each module Select At the execution time of specified program in Refresh Setting of each module and type the group number of the program to be refreshed Module Parameter Refres...

Страница 68: ...to be managed as a separate program Page 63 Standby type program Use the ECALL instruction and other similar instructions to call program files For details on nesting nesting structure of subroutine programs refer to the nesting N Page 360 Nesting N Precautions The following lists the precautions when using the subroutine program When using a local device setting of SM776 Local device setting at C...

Страница 69: ...364 The priority for the interrupt pointer numbers and interrupt factors However before that interrupt must be enabled by using the EI instruction Making a program a standby type allows it to be managed as a separate program Page 63 Standby type program 1 This indicates the end of the main routine program I0 Interrupt factor for I0 I29 Interrupt factor for I29 FEND EI IRET IRET END I0 I29 1 Main r...

Страница 70: ...ution type program including an interrupt which triggers the event execution type program is triggered while an interrupt program is being executed the program operates in accordance with the interrupt priority Page 81 Interrupt priority If multiple interrupt factors occur simultaneously while the interrupt is enabled The interrupt programs are executed in the order of priority If multiple interru...

Страница 71: ... IMASK instruction and SIMASK instruction are used to disable the interrupt all the memorized factors will be discarded 1 The second and following interrupt factors that occur while interrupts have been disabled DI are not memorized 2 When interrupts are enabled interrupts are executed in order from I49 because it has a higher priority 3 I28 is executed I49 is not executed for the second time Mc M...

Страница 72: ...umber of cycle overrun events for inter module synchronization cycle program I44 reaches its upper limit If the IMASK instruction and SIMASK instruction are used to disable the interrupt all the memorized factors will be discarded Sc Inter module synchronization cycle 1 The interrupt factor is memorized 2 Because an interrupt does not occur the memorized information is discarded in the second cycl...

Страница 73: ...y Although both I50 and I80 have the same priority level I50 is executed ahead of I80 because I50 has a higher priority order 3 I80 is executed I50 is not executed for the second time 4 I100 is executed I80 is not executed for the second time Mc Multiple CPU synchronization cycle 1 The interrupt factor is memorized 2 The second and following interrupt factors that occur while interrupts have been ...

Страница 74: ... execution is completed interrupts are executed in order from I29 because it has a higher priority 4 The second interrupt is executed 1 The second and following interrupt factors that occur while interrupts are being executed operate according to the setting of the fixed scan execution mode 2 The program is not executed for the second time 3 After the interrupt in execution is completed interrupts...

Страница 75: ...un events for inter module synchronization cycle program I44 reaches its upper limit Sc Inter module synchronization cycle 1 The interrupt factor is memorized 2 Because an interrupt does not occur the memorized information is discarded in the second cycle 3 After I49 that has a higher priority level is completed I44 is executed 4 After I45 that has the same priority level and a higher priority ord...

Страница 76: ...iple times it will be memorized once but operation at the second and later occurrences depends on setting of the fixed scan execution mode Page 57 Fixed scan execution mode When Execution Count Takes Priority is enabled the interrupt program corresponding to the memorized interrupt factor will be executed after the running interrupt program finishes When Precede Fixed Scan is enabled the second an...

Страница 77: ...interrupt program for this cause cannot be executed SM480 Cycle overrun flag for inter module synchronization program I44 is turned on and SD480 Number of cycle overrun events for inter module synchronization cycle program I44 reaches its upper limit Sc Inter module synchronization cycle 1 The interrupt factor is discarded because the same interrupt I44 is being executed 2 The interrupt is not exe...

Страница 78: ...odule switches to the RUN state and the interrupt is enabled the interrupt program will not be executed upon occurrence of the first interrupt factor Then the interrupt program will be executed during the second cycle after the switch to the RUN state 1 The second and following interrupt factors that occur while the CPU module is in the STOP state are not memorized 2 When interrupts are enabled by...

Страница 79: ...eter Interrupt Settings Interrupt Enable Setting in Executing Instruction Window Displayed items Item Item Description Setting range Default Interrupt Setting from Internal Timer I28 Sets the execution interval of I28 0 5 to 1000ms in units of 0 5ms 100 0ms I29 Sets the execution interval of I29 40 0ms I30 Sets the execution interval of I30 20 0ms I31 Sets the execution interval of I31 10 0ms I48 ...

Страница 80: ...PU Parameter Interrupt Settings Block No Save Recovery Setting Window Displayed items When the block number of the file register R is not changed during execution of an interrupt program enabling Not Saved Recovered can reduce the startup time and the termination time of the interrupt program Page 899 Overhead time when executing the interrupt program To change the block number of the file registe...

Страница 81: ... as a value specific to the scan execution type program Using the value in an interrupt program is not needed to be concerned 2 This value can be used only at the moment an interrupt program fixed scan execution type program or event execution type program is executed The value cannot be used continuously Z0 0 Z0 3 1 Z0 0 Z0 0 Z0 0 Z0 0 Z0 0 Z0 0 2 1 Interrupt program Fixed scan execution type pro...

Страница 82: ... be used as a value specific to the interrupt program This value can be used continuously Z0 0 Z0 3 3 D0 0 D0 3 D0 3 D0 3 Z0 0 Z0 3 4 D0 3 Z0 0 Z0 0 Z0 0 Z0 0 Z0 0 MOV D0 Z0 I50 MOV K3 Z0 IRET MOV Z0 D0 FEND Ò Ó Ò Ó 1 2 Value of the index register Save area of the index register for scan execution type programs Save Return Without change Without change Save Interrupt program Execution program Main...

Страница 83: ...ority setting 1 A high priority interrupt is executed by interrupting a low priority interrupt 2 Even if a high priority interrupt occurs it enters the waiting status until the interrupt in execution is completed Interrupt priority Interrupt factor Interrupt pointer Execution sequence at simultaneous occurrence Changeability High Low 1 High speed interrupt by internal timer 1 I49 Unchangeable Fixe...

Страница 84: ...d items Interrupt Settings window 1 Set Multiple Interrupt to Enable on the Interrupt Settings window and click Detailed Setting Detailed Setting window 2 Change the priority of each interrupt pointer Item Description Setting range Default Multiple Interrupt Sets whether or not to enable multiple interrupt Disable Enable Disable Interrupt priority Detailed Setting Sets the priority of the interrup...

Страница 85: ...iority respectively Priority Interrupt pointer High Low 1 I49 2 I48 3 I44 I45 4 I28 I29 I30 I31 5 I101 6 I0 I50 I100 7 I1020 8 An interrupt pointer among I50 to I1023 with the priority other than 5 to 7 1 Interrupt is enabled 2 Interrupts with priority 3 to 8 are disabled 3 I28 is not executed because interrupts with priority 3 to 8 are disabled 4 I48 is executed because it is a higher priority in...

Страница 86: ...atus because its interrupt priority is lower 4 I101 is executed because its interrupt priority is higher 5 Return from interrupt Execution of the interrupted I50 resumes 6 Enters the waiting status until the execution of I50 completes because its interrupt priority is the same as that of I50 by setting 7 I0 is executed before I100 because its interrupt pointer is smaller 8 Return from interrupt I1...

Страница 87: ...taking the following measures Limit each character string used in a program to 32 characters or less in length Decrease the multiplex interrupts Reduce the number of times to access the Q series module or the number of points Do not access the Q series module from multiple CPU modules when the multiple CPU system is configured Monitoring the interrupt program execution time The execution time of t...

Страница 88: ...f interrupts during instruction execution are set to Enable in the interrupt enabled during instruction execution setting and the interrupt program is executed when the following conditions are met the interrupt program processing time will take longer Page 77 Interrupt enabled during instruction execution If accessing the refresh data register RD a module label or labels or using FB ST FBD in the...

Страница 89: ...put mode at operating status change STOP to RUN Status of the output Y that was saved during the STOP state Operation result after the completion of one scan The device memory other than the output Y holds the status immediately before the RUN state However if a device initial value is set up this initial value is set In addition the local devices are cleared Operation processing in STOP state In ...

Страница 90: ...e END instruction and then stops Saves the output Y status immediately before the STOP state and all points turn off Retains the device memory status immediately before the STOP state Saves the output Y status immediately before the STOP state and all points turn off RUN PAUSE Stops the operation after the execution of one scan Retains the output Y status immediately before the PAUSE state Retains...

Страница 91: ...state the status prior to the STOP state is output If the output Y was off before entering the STOP state the status when it was on is not retained In the following figure X20 represents the start button X21 represents the stop button and Y represents an output Clearing the output Y output after one scan All outputs are turned off and the output Y is output after the program operations are execute...

Страница 92: ...CPU Parameter Operation Related Setting Output Mode Setting of STOP to RUN Window Displayed items Item Description Setting range Default Output Mode of STOP to RUN Set the operation of the output Y when the operating status is changed from STOP to RUN Output the Output Y Status before STOP Clear Output is 1 scan later the Output Y Output the Output Y Status before STOP ...

Страница 93: ...the timer device continues In addition the output status is held When the momentary power failure is cleared Once the momentary power failure is cleared the operation processing continues Measurement of the watchdog timer WDT at a momentary power failure Even if the operation is suspended due to a momentary power failure measurement of the watchdog timer continues For example assuming that the mon...

Страница 94: ...h Battery less Option Cassette 3 This memory can be used in the R04CPU R08CPU R16CPU R32CPU R120CPU R04ENCPU R08ENCPU R16ENCPU R32ENCPU and R120ENCPU 4 An SD memory card cannot be used in the R00CPU The usage of the memory can be checked from the engineering tool GX Works3 Operating Manual The number of writes for the program memory and data memory is limited to 100000 times When using the functio...

Страница 95: ...a program from the programmable controller with the engineering tool 2 Depending on the model and firmware version of the CPU module the destination of the file header area is the data memory Page 94 Destination of the file header area For read write operations from to the programmable controller refer to the following GX Works3 Operating Manual 1 When data is written to the programmable controlle...

Страница 96: ...s can be written or read in file unit Free space of areas can be checked in Device Label Memory Area Capacity Setting Page 95 Device label memory area setting CPU module Firmware version R04CPU R08CPU R16CPU R32CPU R120CPU R04ENCPU R08ENCPU R16ENCPU R32ENCPU R120ENCPU 30 or earlier Process CPU 12 or earlier Safety CPU Standard program 12 or earlier Safety program All firmware versions Area Applica...

Страница 97: ... SRAM cassette or battery less option cassette in Cassette Setting 2 Set the capacity of each area in Device Label Memory Area Capacity Setting Item Description Setting range Default Cassette Setting 3 Extended SRAM Cassette Setting When using an extended SRAM cassette select the capacity of the cassette Not Mounted 1MB 2MB 4MB 8MB 16MB 1 Not Mounted Battery less Option Cassette Setting 1 4 Set wh...

Страница 98: ...hich is smaller than the following is the area not used R00CPU R01CPU R02CPU 30K words R04CPU R04ENCPU 40K words R08CPU R08ENCPU R08PCPU 50K words R16CPU R16ENCPU R16PCPU 60K words R32CPU R32ENCPU R32PCPU 70K words R120CPU R120ENCPU R120PCPU 90K words The setting range of the capacity of each area 1The following tables list the setting range of the capacity of each area on the device label memory ...

Страница 99: ...ssette 1MB With an extended SRAM cassette 2MB With an extended SRAM cassette 4MB With an extended SRAM cassette 8MB With an extended SRAM cassette 16MB Device area 2 to 860K words 2 to 1372K words 2 to 1884K words 2 to 2908K words 2 to 4956K words 2 to 9052K words Label area 0 to 858K words 0 to 1370K words 0 to 1882K words 0 to 2906K words 0 to 4954K words 0 to 9050K words Latch label area 0 to 8...

Страница 100: ...ion memory This memory is temporarily used for the specific function The following is the function that uses the function memory Also data can be deleted or transferred to the data memory by using the special relay Page 814 Drive information Refresh memory This memory is used to store data used to refresh communication with the intelligent function module Page 359 Refresh Data Register RD CPU buff...

Страница 101: ...PLSY PWM MTR SORTD _U DSORTD _U LEDR DUTY LOGTRG LOGTRGR TIMCHK HOURM DHOURM PID XCALL SCJ SD memory card This memory is used to store the folder file created by a function using the SD memory card as well as the user s folder file The folder configuration is the same as the data memory However in the case of the SD memory card the MELPRJ folder will be created when the SD memory card becomes avai...

Страница 102: ...U it is written as 1024 bytes of data because the file size unit of the data memory is 1024 bytes File size unit of each SD memory card CPU module File size unit Program memory Device label memory Data memory Function memory R00CPU R01CPU R02CPU 4 bytes 512 bytes 1024 bytes R04CPU R04ENCPU 2048 bytes R08CPU R08ENCPU 2048 bytes R16CPU R16ENCPU 4096 bytes R32CPU R32ENCPU 8192 bytes R120CPU R120ENCPU...

Страница 103: ...on During execution of the iQ Sensor Solution data backup restoration function file register areas cannot be cleared to zero Check that the iQ Sensor Solution data backup restoration function is not being executed and then clear file register areas to zero Items to be specified in the engineering tool Target Initialization Data memory Deletes all the folders and files in the program memory and dat...

Страница 104: ... device value ANY_STRING DID Global label setting file GLBLINF IFG Initial label value file Initial global label value file GLBLINF LID Initial local label value file PROGRAM_NAME LID File register 3 ANY_STRING QDR Event history EVENT LOG Device data storage file 3 DEVSTORE QST General purpose data ANY_STRING CSV BIN Data logging setting file Common setting file LOGCOM LCS Individual setting file ...

Страница 105: ...le it is divided into program memory and data memory and stored Page 106 Configuration of a program file 5 The module extension parameter for the protocol setting is a file for storing protocol setting information in the predefined protocol support function 6 The module specific backup parameter is a file for storing the save or restore data of the module to be replaced by the online module change...

Страница 106: ...ge 1008 Added and Enhanced Functions When the modules that do not support the online change mentioned above are used the operation that is performed in the RUN state continues after the operating status is changed by the remote STOP function 8 If the global label that can be accessed from the external device is set and the CPU module is in the RUN state only read operation is available 9 When the ...

Страница 107: ...hen the setting is configured so that one word data is collected in a binary file at each scan in continuous logging Individual setting file 1192 bytes When the setting is configured so that one word data is collected in a binary file at each scan in continuous logging only for setting No 1 Memory dump setting file 1224 bytes when the save file name is MEMDUMP_00 Remote password 224 bytes minimum ...

Страница 108: ...d to the program memory Program restoration information is allocated to the data memory The destination memory to which each area is allocated when an FB file is stored in the CPU module is the same as that for programs Area Destination memory Description File header Program memory This area stores the configuration of the file and the labels and information of FBs used in the program The size dif...

Страница 109: ...8 BOOT OPERATION 9 MONITOR FUNCTION 10 TEST FUNCTION 11 DATA LOGGING FUNCTION 12 DEBUG FUNCTION 13 DATABASE FUNCTION 14 PID CONTROL PROCESS CONTROL FUNCTION 15 CPU MODULE DATA BACKUP RESTORATION FUNCTION 16 MULTIPLE CPU SYSTEM FUNCTION 17 SECURITY FUNCTION 18 SEQUENCE SCAN SYNCHRONIZATION SAMPLING FUNCTION 19 LABEL INITIALIZATION FUNCTION 20 ROUTING SETTING ...

Страница 110: ...sing the SNTP server When the clock data is changed the following operation is performed The millisecond value is reset to zero Depending on the millisecond value immediately before the reset the second value can be rounded up Considering that the second value can increase by one second maximum when the clock data is changed configure the system Clock setting Event code 24000 is logged in the even...

Страница 111: ... When SM213 Clock data read request is turned on the clock data is read to SD210 to SD216 Using the instruction Use the DATERD P S P DATERD instructions to read the clock data from the CPU module MELSEC iQ R Programming Manual CPU Module Instructions Standard Functions Function Blocks Precautions on the clock data The following lists the precautions on the clock data When using the product for the...

Страница 112: ...CPU module it operates with UTC 9 On the multiple CPU system the time zone setting of the CPU No 1 is used for other CPU modules the time zone setting of CPUs No 2 to 4 is not applied even when it is specified Item Description Setting range Default Time Zone Sets the time zone used by the CPU module UTC 13 UTC 12 UTC 11 UTC 10 UTC 9 30 UTC 9 UTC 8 UTC 7 UTC 6 30 UTC 6 UTC 5 45 UTC 5 30 UTC 5 UTC 4...

Страница 113: ...s at 2 00 on the first Sunday in November Before executing the daylight saving time function check the versions of the CPU module and engineering tool used Page 1008 Added and Enhanced Functions Daylight saving time setting Sets the starting date and ending date for daylight saving time CPU Parameter Operation Related Setting Clock Related Setting Setting to Adjust Clock for Daylight Saving Time W...

Страница 114: ... for Daylight Saving Time Sets whether to enable the daylight saving time setting Enable Disable Disable Start End Time Specification Method Sets the timing of the switch to daylight saving time to specified week or specified date Specified week Specified date Specified week Week Start Month Sets the daylight saving time starting date 1 to 12 3 Week 1st Week 2nd Week 3rd Week 4th Week The Last Wee...

Страница 115: ...s than one hour from the starting time of the daylight saving time for CPU modules for CPU Nos 2 to 4 For the period less than one hour from the starting time or less than one hour until the ending time of daylight saving time the function that is triggered by time may not work or may work twice When the Setting to Adjust Clock for Daylight Saving Time is enabled functions operate based on date in...

Страница 116: ...f the system clock Special register used for system clock Special register used for system clock are as follows Page 850 System clock SM number Name SM400 Always On SM401 Always Off SM402 After RUN ON for 1 scan only SM403 After RUN OFF for 1 scan only SM409 0 01 second clock SM410 0 1 second clock SM411 0 2 second clock SM412 1 second clock SM413 2 second clock SM414 2n second clock SM415 2n mill...

Страница 117: ... When using the SIL2 Process CPU refer to the following as well Page 605 FUNCTIONS When using the Safety CPU refer to the following as well Page 535 FUNCTIONS Type Description Reference Online change Online change ladder block Changes and writes a part of the program and data online Page 115 Online change ladder block GX Works3 Operating Manual Online change SFC block Changes adds or deletes SFC b...

Страница 118: ...a is 48 words for non latch type local labels 16 words for latch type labels and 4 words for signal flow memory by default The reserved area can be changed for each function block definition GX Works3 Operating Manual 2 The subroutine type FB and FUN interface information means All FB definition FUN definitions and their definition numbers contained in FB files Definition names The number of all i...

Страница 119: ...e of the data memory size of program restoration information for the online change ladder block in the R120CPU with a firmware version 30 or earlier Online change ladder block during the boot operation When the online change ladder block is performed while booting from the SD memory card the corresponding files on the booting SD memory card can also be changed CPU module Firmware version Required ...

Страница 120: ...en the label definition the initial value or any other value is changed write the initial label value file to the CPU module after the online change ladder block Otherwise an error occurs when the CPU module is powered off and on or reset or the module operating status is changed from STOP to RUN To clear all the initial values delete the initial label value files in the CPU module If the boot ope...

Страница 121: ...s failed SM385 System operation setting error turns on and an error is stored in SD385 System operation setting error cause 4 Check that SM385 is off and turn off or reset the CPU module 5 SM388 turns on This setting requires powering off the system or resetting the CPU module For this reason configure this setting before system operation when executing the file batch online change of FB files and...

Страница 122: ...troller excluding device local device global label or local label data File batch online change or online change ladder block Memory initialization Writing during the program memory transfer When the program memory transfer starts during writing to the programmable controller or the online change from an engineering tool writing to the programmable controller or the online change from another engi...

Страница 123: ...ing instruction When a rising instruction exists within the range to be changed the rising instruction will not be executed even if the execution condition OFF to ON is satisfied after completion of the online change ladder block or writing data to the programmable controller Instructions which do not operate correctly Description Rising instruction PLS and P instructions When a rising instruction...

Страница 124: ...rogram will jump without waiting for a single scan 1 The falling instruction will not be executed even if the execution condition is OFF to OFF 2 If a completion of the online program change and a timing of satisfying the execution condition ON to OFF occur simultaneously the falling instruction will not be executed 1 The program jumps to the specified pointer 2 The program jumps to the specified ...

Страница 125: ...time monitoring time WDT setting is exceeded Increase in scan time of the online change ladder block When a global label or a local label is added or when there are many programs FB files to be changed or many changes the scan time may be increased by several dozen milliseconds Online change ladder block of when another function is performed The online change ladder block cannot be performed durin...

Страница 126: ...ock after the data is rebuilt reassigned Falling instruction in the subroutine type FB program When writing an FB file online do not use falling instructions in the subroutine type FB program while SM388 File batch online change operation setting status is on File batch online change during execution of another function The file batch online change cannot be executed during execution of the follow...

Страница 127: ...e set time of the watchdog timer the watchdog timer does not count up If the END FEND instruction cannot be executed within the set time of the watchdog timer due to a hardware error of the CPU module or increase in program execution time due to an interrupt or other causes the watchdog timer counts up When using the Process CPU redundant mode refer to the following as well Page 435 FUNCTIONS When...

Страница 128: ...atchdog timer counts up while a program is being repeatedly executed by the FOR instruction and NEXT instruction use the WDT reset instruction to reset the watchdog timer Scan time when the WDT reset instruction is used Even when the watchdog timer is reset by the WDT reset instruction the scan time is not reset The scan time is accumulated until the END instruction is executed FOR K1000 WDT NEXT ...

Страница 129: ...ence conditions can be checked through the lighting conditions of ERROR LED MELSEC iQ R CPU Module User s Manual Startup Check method using the engineering tool The error conditions for the overall system error or event history being currently generated can be checked on the Module diagnostics window GX Works3 Operating Manual Existing errors Up to 16 errors description of errors currently existin...

Страница 130: ... not be accessible even when it is re installed Therefore if an access to the re installed module occurs by switching the operating status of the CPU module from STOP to RUN 2 When Not Detected is set values are stored in the special relay and special register SM150 to SM154 SD150 to SD154 that indicate the status of the redundant power supply module 3 When a battery is installed change the settin...

Страница 131: ... 1020H Battery error 1090H Module verification error 2400H 2401H Fuse blown error 2420H Item Description Setting range Default Instruction Execution Error I O No Network No Specification Error Sets the CPU module operation when a specification error of I O numbers Network numbers has been detected Stop Continue Stop Device Label Buffer Memory Specification Incorrect Sets the CPU module operation w...

Страница 132: ...ligent function module Stop setting For the multiple CPU system configuration it can be specified whether or not to stop all CPU modules when a major or moderate error occurs on a CPU module Page 291 Stop setting Error name Error code Memory card error 2120H 2121H Module verification error 2400H 2401H Fuse blown error 2420H Inter module synchronization signal error 2610H Multiple CPU synchronizati...

Страница 133: ...n that is set in the above setting When the external input output forced on off function is executed in registration Page 154 FUNCTION LED When program restoration information is not written Page 942 Checking the program restoration information write status When the device tests with execution conditions are registered Page 157 Device test with execution conditions Item Description Setting range D...

Страница 134: ... the built in Ethernet function instruction MELSEC iQ R Programming Manual CPU Module Instructions Standard Functions Function Blocks Data is not retained in SD49 during power failure Therefore register this setting again after turning off and on or resetting the CPU module Applicable errors to the error detection invalidation setting The following table lists errors for which the detection of the...

Страница 135: ...g error 1120H Default gateway gateway IP address error 1124H Own node port number error 1128H Open specification port number error 1129H Specified IP address error 112DH Connection establishment failed 112EH Socket communications response send error 1133H TCP connection timeout 1134H IP address error 1152H Connection number acquisition error 1155H Receive buffer securement error 1157H UDP IP send ...

Страница 136: ...r 1B60H 1B61H Tracking communications disabled 1B70H Tracking communication error 1B71H 1B78H Tracking transfer error 1B80H 1B81H 1B82H Redundant function module error 1BA0H System switching error 1BD0H Memory card error 2120H 2121H Module verification error 2400H 2401H Fuse blown error 2420H Module major error 2441H 2442H 2450H Another CPU module major error 2461H 2462H 2470H Inter module synchro...

Страница 137: ...s section describes some precautions to take when using the error clear function Since the function clears all of the currently detected continuation errors at once errors that should not yet be cleared may be cleared Use the RST instruction to reset each annunciator individually Running the error clear function does not remove the cleared errors from the event history The cause of an error which ...

Страница 138: ...hen the event history information cannot be collected due to a major error in a module a base unit error a cable failure or some other cause Event history setting Under normal circumstances the event history function can be used with its default settings and need not be manually configured The storage memory and size settings for event history files can be changed as needed Page 137 Event history ...

Страница 139: ...the SD memory card when the write protect switch of the SD memory card is enabled an event history will not be stored It is possible to read the event history file in SD memory card using the engineering tool Therefore if the write protect switch of the SD memory card is changed into Disabled Enabled during operation the write error to the SD memory card occurs when the event for storing into even...

Страница 140: ...ngineering tool Calculation formula 128 bytes 1024 131072 bytes 131072 bytes 20 bytes 12 bytes 131040 bytes 131040 bytes 96 bytes 1365 events Ex The table below shows the size of each element when 100 programs whose program name is 8 characters 12 characters including a period and extension are written to the CPU module by the following operating procedure Operating procedure 1 Turn on the power i...

Страница 141: ...vent Code field of the engineering tool Viewing the event history The event history can be viewed using the menus of the engineering tool For operating procedures and how to interpret the displayed information refer to the following GX Works3 Operating Manual Clearing the event history The event history can be cleared from the event history window Once the event history is cleared the CPU module d...

Страница 142: ... the following function Check that the following function is not being executed and then read the event history CPU module data restoration function 6 5 Program Cache Memory Auto Recovery Function If the contents of memory of the CPU module have been rewritten by itself due to the factors such as excessive electrical noise the program cache memory recovers the corresponding areas automatically dur...

Страница 143: ...d resumes the program operation from the step 0 Using an engineering tool Perform remote RUN STOP with the remote operation of the engineering tool GX Works3 Operating Manual By an external device using SLMP Perform remote RUN STOP with the SLMP command SLMP Reference Manual Using the module dedicated instructions Perform remote RUN STOP with the dedicated instructions of a network module MELSEC i...

Страница 144: ...etting Page 143 Setting RUN PAUSE Contacts When the END processing for the scan where the PAUSE contact is turned on is executed SM204 PAUSE contact turns on When the CPU module executes until the END instruction for the scan next to that where the PAUSE contact is turned on its status changes to PAUSE and the operation stops When the PAUSE contact is turned off the CPU module exits the PAUSE stat...

Страница 145: ...tate Enabling remote RESET Performing remote RESET requires setting for enabling remote reset CPU Parameter Operation Related Setting Remote Reset Setting Window Displayed items Executing method Using an engineering tool Perform remote RESET with the remote operation of the engineering tool GX Works3 Operating Manual By an external device using SLMP Perform remote RESET with the SLMP command SLMP ...

Страница 146: ...the SD memory card 4 Power off and on or reset the CPU module This function cannot be used in the R00CPU When using the Process CPU redundant mode refer to the following as well Page 435 FUNCTIONS 1 The boot operation is executed according to the boot file setting when the CPU module is powered on or is reset RnCPU RnENCPU RnPSFCPU RnPSFCPU RnSFCPU RnSFCPU RnPCPU RnPCPU Standard Safety Standard Sa...

Страница 147: ...Global label setting file Initial global label value file Program file Initial local label value file FB FUN file Device comment line Initial device value file 8 3 Allowed Maximum Number of Boot Files The maximum number of boot file settings which can be specified is 512 However because more than one file is bootable for a single setting the maximum number of boot files is the same as the number o...

Страница 148: ...imum number of boot files that can be specified is the same as the number of files that can be stored in the storage memory Add Type window 3 Select type for the boot file Multiple selection is possible Boot File Setting window 4 Set the data name file name Item Description Setting range Default Operation Setting at CPU Built in Memory Boot Sets whether or not to clear the CPU built in memory upon...

Страница 149: ...ven when stored on the SD memory card the CPU module operates in accordance with the settings in the parameter file inside it If a program in the program memory is changed online during boot operation the change is also reflected in the transfer source program on the SD memory card Note the model of the program written on the SD memory card program specified in the boot file settings and the model...

Страница 150: ... refer to the following GX LogViewer Version 1 Operating Manual Item Description Reference Circuit monitor Checks the status of the running program on the program editor GX Works3 Operating Manual Device buffer memory batch monitor Checks the current values of the device and buffer memory in a batch Watch Registers a device and label and checks the current values Program monitor list Checks the pr...

Страница 151: ...9 MONITOR FUNCTION 9 1 Real Time Monitor Function 149 9 MEMO ...

Страница 152: ...MELSEC iQ R series modules and Q series modules mounted on an extension base unit Before executing the external input output forced on off function check the versions of the CPU module and engineering tool used Page 1008 Added and Enhanced Functions When using the Process CPU redundant mode refer to the following as well Page 435 FUNCTIONS External input External output 1 Turn off X0 forcibly 2 Th...

Страница 153: ...s reflected the input devices for which forced on off registration is set are forcibly turned on or off Output The following external outputs are turned on or off by refreshing output devices that have been forcibly turned on or off 1 Refresh target output of modules mounted on the base unit Link refresh target output of network modules Link refresh target output of CC Link IE Field Network Basic ...

Страница 154: ...s Item Description Device Enter target devices X Y Register Forced ON button Registers forced on for the entered devices X Y Register Forced OFF button Registers forced off for the entered devices X Y Cancel Registration button Cancels forced on off for the registered devices X Y Update Status button Displays the latest on off states Cancel All Registrations button Batch cancels forced on off for ...

Страница 155: ...ardless of the forced on off registration setting While the operating status of the CPU module is STOP due to a stop error forced on off is enabled only for the input devices If the CPU module is powered off and on or is reset all the forced on off registration information will be canceled Operation Change in the input device in the program Behavior of an input device Forced on registration Change...

Страница 156: ... LDI AND ANI OR ORI LDP LDF ANDP ANDF ORP ORF LDPI LDFI ANDPI ANDFI ORPI ORFI 1 At execution of the RFS instruction and MTR instruction At execution of instructions used in the interrupt by the system UDCNT1 UDCNT2 SPD At program execution 2 At execution of the inter module synchronization cycle program I44 At execution of the multiple CPU synchronization program I45 and non execution of the multi...

Страница 157: ...f in accordance with the on off state refreshed from CC Link Input from RX of CC Link IE Field Network The input device is turned on or off in accordance with the on off state refreshed from CC Link IE Field Network Input from RX of CC Link IE Field Network Basic The input device is turned on or off in accordance with the on off state refreshed from CC Link IE Field Network Basic Input other than ...

Страница 158: ...scan time will increase and a WDT error may occur Execution of interrupt programs which are executed at a fixed scan may delay depending on the number of forced on off registrations and the number of refresh points of each refresh processing When forced on off is registered in the multiple CPU system configuration registration is allowed for input output devices 2 and external outputs regardless o...

Страница 159: ...e program is configured as shown in the example below Before using the device test with execution conditions check the version of the CPU module and the engineering tool used Page 1008 Added and Enhanced Functions 1 The device is operated in accordance with the registered settings M0 of the step number 10 is on RnCPU RnENCPU RnPSFCPU RnPSFCPU RnSFCPU RnSFCPU RnPCPU RnPCPU Standard Safety Standard ...

Страница 160: ...er the device label value status is changed accordingly In the device test with execution conditions a device label value is changed in a specified step regardless of whether or not the instruction execution conditions are satisfied in the specified step In the following example the D0 value is changed to 35 regardless of the status on off of M0 Operation when device test with execution conditions...

Страница 161: ...cified labels cannot be specified 4 Bit specification is allowed 5 Specify the array element 6 Specify the structure member Type Device 3 Bit device 1 X DX Y DY M L F SM V B SB T contact ST contact C contact LT contact LST contact LC contact FX FY Jn X Jn Y Jn SB Jn B Word device 2 T current value ST current value C current value D SD W SW RD R ZR Z FD Un G Jn W Jn SW U3En G U3En HG Double word de...

Страница 162: ...ution conditions When the device test with execution conditions is registered the FUNCTION LED flashes regardless of the LED Display Setting in the RAS Setting Even when the LED Display Setting has been set and other functions that use the FUNCTION LED are being executed the LED indication at the registration of the device test with execution conditions takes priority The LED indication is reset t...

Страница 163: ...ice digit specification of bit device or index modification is handled as different device name Therefore two device tests with execution conditions having different device modification can be registered to one step When bit device bit type label is specified When word device word type label is specified Item Description Device Label Set a device or a label to be registered Page 159 Data that can ...

Страница 164: ... data is read when this operation is performed with no settings registered Disable Selected Conditions buttons Click this button to disable the selected registration of the device test with execution conditions that has been read from the CPU module by using the Update Status button Batch Register button All the existing registrations in the CPU module are disabled by clicking this button and the ...

Страница 165: ...nging a program online the online change ladder block or the file batch online change Page 165 Operation during online change Adding deleting editing global labels in the CPU built in memory by writing data to the programmable controller while the CPU module is in the STOP state 1 2 4 Writing CPU parameters to the CPU built in memory by writing data to the programmable controller while the CPU mod...

Страница 166: ...ND instruction is specified the execution timing cannot be set to After executing instruction Program 1 The device test with execution conditions that sets 20 in D0 in step 100 is registered Setting of execution timing Operation of CPU module Before execution of the instruction in step 101 2 A value in D0 is changed to 20 After execution of the instruction in step 101 3 A value in D0 is changed to...

Страница 167: ... includes registrations of the device test with execution conditions such registrations are disabled When the Registrations 1 to 3 of the device test with execution conditions are registered for the steps as shown below the Registration 2 is disabled upon the execution of the online change ladder block The Registrations 1 and 3 are not disabled because the steps to which they are registered are no...

Страница 168: ...e an instruction to be added is adjacent to an instruction to be changed Therefore even when the device test with execution conditions is registered to the instruction immediately after the instruction to be added the relevant registration is not disabled by the execution of the online change ladder block 1 The registration of the device test with execution conditions of the instruction immediatel...

Страница 169: ... to the instruction immediately after the instruction to be deleted the relevant registration is not disabled by the execution of the online change ladder block 1 The registration of the device test with execution conditions is disabled because the instruction is located immediately after the deleted instruction 2 The registration of the device test with execution conditions is disabled because th...

Страница 170: ...d all the registrations that specify global labels are disabled When SM940 is on the registrations are not disabled 1 1 If reassignment of local labels global labels which are used in the program is performed when SM940 is on registrations including reassigned labels are disabled When SM940 is on do not delete or change local labels or global labels registered to device tests with execution condit...

Страница 171: ...d Scan Interval Setting is as short as 0 05ms and a step number in I49 is specified as an execution condition of a device test with execution conditions the processing time of the interrupt program may exceed the time set in Fixed Scan Interval Setting Therefore a WDT error may occur due to continuous execution of the interrupt program For how to reduce processing time of interrupt programs refer ...

Страница 172: ...n memory is the function memory For system configuration specifications the procedure for operating and configuring this function in the CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool which are not covered here refer to CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool Page 945 How to Use CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool This function cannot be used in the R00CPU When using the Process CPU redundant mode refer to...

Страница 173: ...he project is imported into CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool To use a device and a label at the same time specify them in different data logging settings To specify the local devices of multiple programs specify them in different data logging settings To specify the local labels of multiple programs specify them in different data logging settings Data type Number of data points Bit 1 Word sig...

Страница 174: ...1 4 Digit specified labels cannot be specified 5 Bit specification is allowed 6 For the label of timer type and counter type specify the element name S contact C coil N current value Global label example label_w1 S Local label example ProgPou label_w1 S 7 Specify the array element If the array element is not specified it is handled as the start of the array 0 Page 969 Data 8 Specify the structure ...

Страница 175: ...tion at specified time interval Collects data at specified time interval Data collection during the END processing after specified time interval Collects data during the END processing after specified time interval Interrupt occurrence Collects data at specified time interval after the execution of an interrupt program Condition specification Device label specification Collects data when the monit...

Страница 176: ... be specified are I28 to I31 I44 I45 I48 and I49 Ex When multiple CPU synchronous interrupt I45 is used multiple CPU synchronous interrupt is set to 0 22 milliseconds 0 22ms and interval to 3 Since data collection is performed at the timing of the execution of the interrupt program data is collected only when all of the following conditions are met The specified interrupt meets the operating condi...

Страница 177: ...the comparison value When the current value of the monitored data is smaller than the comparison value To collect data only when the state changes The following conditional formula causes the data logging function to collect data only during the END processing for the scans where the conditional formula is met It does not collect data for any single scan where the conditional formula is not met du...

Страница 178: ...e number of characters 9 Only labels in the read project of the engineering tool can be specified 10 Specify the label with Program block name Label name Example ProgPou label_w1 11 Digit specified labels cannot be specified 12 Bit specification is allowed 13 Only the contacts and current values can be specified 14 For the label of timer type and counter type specify the element name S contact N c...

Страница 179: ...ed condition The specified step is executed if the state changes from running to non running immediately before the execution of it If the specified step is contained between FOR and NEXT loop of instructions the data logging function collects the data for only the first iteration of the loop where the specified conditions are met Since the step number cannot be checked in the following programs t...

Страница 180: ...o stop continuous logging The user can completely stop data logging by instructing CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool to stop data logging and unregister the data logging settings stored in the CPU module The special relay data logging start turns off To suspend resume continuous logging The user can suspend data logging with the data logging settings remaining intact by doing either of the fol...

Страница 181: ...ditions to be used as a trigger The AND condition using a combination of Device Label change specification and Step No specification results in the collection of data at the time when both conditions are established Device label change specification A trigger occurs when the monitored data meets the specified condition Trigger condition Description Condition specification Device label change speci...

Страница 182: ...When the local label is specified program block name label name the program block name part is counted as the number of characters 8 Only labels in the read project of the engineering tool can be specified 9 Specify the label with Program block name Label name Example ProgPou label_w1 10 Digit specified labels cannot be specified 11 Bit specification is allowed 12 Only the contacts and current val...

Страница 183: ... may not be met Execution condition Description Always Executes the specified step regardless of the state immediately before the execution of it In the specified condition satisfied Executes the specified step if the state immediately before the execution is a running state In the specified condition not satisfied Executes the specified step if the state immediately before the execution is not a ...

Страница 184: ... from suspension do either of the following Instruct CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool to resume data logging the special relay data logging start turns on Turn on and off the special relay Data logging suspend resume flag Number of records Specify the number of records to be collected before and after the satisfaction of a trigger condition Page 974 Number of logging lines 1 This number inclu...

Страница 185: ...cable 1 The function memory can be used in the CPU module with a firmware version 31 or later Page 1008 Added and Enhanced Functions Data logging into different storage locations SD memory card and function memory cannot be executed simultaneously When the storage location is the function memory up to two data loggings can be executed simultaneously Up to 10 data loggings can be set File format Ap...

Страница 186: ...n of another function 2 RUN waiting no collection Data collection has not yet begun because the operating status of the CPU module is not in the RUN state Start waiting no collection Data collection is inactive waiting for the start command Pause 1 Data logging is suspended and data collection has not yet been started The data logging settings remain intact Condition waiting no collection Data log...

Страница 187: ...ction Page 131 LED display setting States of the Data Logging Function LED status FUNCTION LED CARD READY LED 1 CARD ACCESS LED 1 Data logging settings have been registered by the start operation from CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool After registering the auto logging common setting an SD memory card that stores the setting for which the auto logging function is enabled has been inserted On O...

Страница 188: ...nal buffer 2 The data stored in the internal buffer is stored into the SD memory card at the timing of a file save operation 3 With the file transfer setting data logging files can be transferred from the SD memory card to the FTP server Page 194 Data Logging File Transfer Auto Transfer to FTP Server 1 2 3 2 First collected data Second collected data First collected data Second collected data Devi...

Страница 189: ...files can be transferred from the function memory to the FTP server Page 194 Data Logging File Transfer Auto Transfer to FTP Server 4 Without the file transfer setting data logging files are transferred to the data memory upon completion or stopping of the data logging including when an error occurs Page 202 Data Logging File Transfer to Data Memory 1 3 4 2 2 First collected data Second collected ...

Страница 190: ...vidually for each data logging setting number 1 to 10 CPU Parameter Memory Device Setting Internal Buffer Capacity Setting For trigger logging increasing the internal buffer capacity allows an increase in the number of collected data before trigger and also helps to prevent processing overflow If the free space in the internal buffer is still insufficient after increasing the internal buffer capac...

Страница 191: ...d by multiplying Number of data points by 2 bytes Note however that additional space is consumed by columns configured for output as indicated below Date time column 10 bytes Data collection interval column 8 bytes Execution step No column 10 bytes Execution program No column 2 bytes Index column 4 bytes Ex When data logging is configured to collect as much data as one setting x 128 records and ou...

Страница 192: ...tting when the number of records has reached the maximum number the file size has reached the maximum size the CPU module is stopped or suspended resumed or data logging is started and there is an existing stack file Trigger logging does not require the configuration of these settings because the stack file is automatically switched to a storage file after as much data as the specified number of r...

Страница 193: ...be a file name combining any of the following 2 When using an above formatted string as it is enclose a character string with double quotation marks to add it Example When adding the character string address to the file name address address_00000001 bin can be used However when a character string that contains double quotation marks is specified the maximum number reduces by the number of the doub...

Страница 194: ... the file with the lowest serial number results in an empty folder the CPU module deletes that folder as well When Stop is selected As described in the following table the action differs depending on when the specified maximum number of storage files is exceeded 1 When an attempt is made to register the data logging settings again the CPU module enters into the data logging completed state A speci...

Страница 195: ...mes full before all of the data stored in it is saved to the storage memory however the CPU module does not overwrite the existing data and stops storing data in the internal buffer thus resulting in missing data This situation is referred to as processing overflow Upon the occurrence overflow the special register Number of processing overflow occurrences stores the number of times when processing...

Страница 196: ...Enhanced Functions An FTP server is required for the data logging file transfer function For details on the server refer to the manual for the server used The operation of this function is checked with the following FTP server This function cannot be used in the R00CPU Item Supported operating system FTP server whose operation is checked by Mitsubishi Microsoft Internet Infomation Services IIS The...

Страница 197: ... data logging file caused the error is omitted from the standby files A following file in the same setting number becomes a new standby file If the file switching timing occurs during a file transfer the file that has been being transferred becomes a standby file If the data logging operation is completed or the user has operated CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool to stop data logging the data ...

Страница 198: ...er Authorize the user of the data logging file transfer function to read write files Manual for the server used Engineering tool setting 1 Set the IP address of the CPU module Set the subnet mask and default gateway as necessary Navigation window Parameter CPU module Module Parameter Basic Settings Own Node Settings IP Address 2 To specify an FTP server with the server name set To Use or Not to Us...

Страница 199: ...e server name the DNS setting is required Page 196 Engineering tool setting 4 Click the File Transfer Test button to execute the file transfer test to the FTP server Before operating the system execute the file transfer test and ensure the connection with the FTP server Page 198 File transfer test 5 Set the timeout time and other items on the File transfer window Page 199 Setting on the File trans...

Страница 200: ...me is fixed to 10 seconds Even if the file transfer test fails due to a communication error the retry is not executed Even if the file transfer test fails the error is not stored in the file transfer error history Page 992 File Transfer Error Log Precautions File transfer tests cannot be executed simultaneously with another configuration tool Execute the file transfer test after the file transfer ...

Страница 201: ...e data logging file transfer function Ex When a data logging file of the data logging setting No 1 has not been transferred due to a network failure The retry ends when the network is recovered and retry of the file transfer succeeds Matching the folder structure of the transfer destination FTP server with the CPU module When the data logging file is transferred the directory is automatically crea...

Страница 202: ...d If there is no file in the saved file storage folder subdirectory as a result of the file deletion the saved file storage folder subdirectory is deleted while data logging is stopped LOG01 00000001 txt 00000002 txt 00000100 txt 00000101 txt 00000102 txt 1 3 2 File storage folder LOG01 LOG02 LOG03 00000001 txt 00000002 txt 00000002 txt 00000003 txt 00000004 txt 00000001 txt 00000002 txt 00000001 ...

Страница 203: ... data logging setting numbers can be set for SD1203 2 Turn off and on SM1203 Data logging file transfer stop request When multiple data logging setting numbers are specified for SD1203 and SM1203 is turned off and on SM1203 turns off after the data logging file transfer of all the data logging setting numbers stops 3 At the completion of the file transfer stop processing an error is stored in each...

Страница 204: ...to the data memory The data logging cannot be started during the data transfer to the data memory An error occurs when starting the data logging Page 219 Starting data logging during the data transfer to the data memory An error during the data transfer to the data memory is stored in SD1217 Data logging file transfer error cause Page 862 Data logging function 1 At the logging completion or stop i...

Страница 205: ...tarting data logging in CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool and switching the operating status of the CPU module to RUN Online Logging Status and Operation Start by user operation The data logging status becomes Start waiting no collection after the user operation of starting data logging in CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool and switching the operating status of the CPU module to RUN To star...

Страница 206: ... is not used delete the auto logging common setting file Page 986 Writing the logging setting Page 987 Deleting the logging setting Auto logging start conditions Auto logging starts in the following cases Inserting the SD memory card with the auto logging setting while the CPU module is running Auto logging starts when the SD memory card with the auto logging setting is inserted while the CPU modu...

Страница 207: ...ng is suspended and resumed by stopping and running the CPU module or turning off and on the CPU module or resetting it before the completion of auto logging If auto logging is suspended by the turning off and on of the special relay Data logging suspend resume flag the timer continues to run even while data logging is suspended Conditions under which auto logging does not start Doing any of the f...

Страница 208: ...hing condition as described in the following table 1 While the data logging file transfer function is used numbering begins at 00000001 only when the Delete files completed transfer is disabled in the File transfer setting of CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool If the new SD memory card contains a LOGGING folder and its subfolders folder deletion takes time possibly resulting in missing data Ens...

Страница 209: ...standard for the replacement of the card Calculation formula of SD memory card life SD memory card life year Total size of data that can be written G bytes Size of data to be written per year G bytes year Total size of data that can be written Capacity Number of writes 1 1 For the capacity of applicable SD memory cards and the number of writes refer to the following MELSEC iQ R Module Configuratio...

Страница 210: ... switching is obtained by multiplying the scan time by 1000 Therefore the number of file switching times for the data logging per year is obtained by the following formula 60 60 24 365 Scan time second 1000 11 14 Errors Generated During Data Logging No diagnostic error occurs if an error occurs during data logging the SM applicable to the special relay data logging error setting No turns on and th...

Страница 211: ...llection target or trigger condition When the bit of the corresponding setting No of SD940 Stop direction at file change on label specification is on changing the global label setting file when the global label is specified or the program file when the local label is specified to files different from the ones at the start operation of data logging causes a data logging error The online change ladd...

Страница 212: ...to execute the subsequent function attempting to start the subsequent function results in an error The data logging continues to function normally Auto logging Data logging function Another data logging cannot be executed during the execution of the auto logging Even if data logging is started by using CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool another data logging cannot be executed until the SD memor...

Страница 213: ...n the start operation of the data logging is performed during the file batch online change CPU module data backup function While the CPU module data backup function is being executed a logging setting file cannot be written deleted or a logging setting cannot be registered cleared CPU module data restoration function While the CPU module data restoration function is being executed a logging settin...

Страница 214: ...d off and on or is reset 1 1 If the data logging setting file contained in the replacement new SD memory card is different from that contained in the replaced old SD memory card register the data logging setting file contained in the replacement SD memory card It is necessary to register the data logging settings again by the user operation of starting data logging in CPU Module Logging Configurat...

Страница 215: ... change the file name and block number of the file register file in the following cases the file register is specified as the device or the global label where the file register is assigned as the label for the condition specification in the Sampling and Trigger settings Doing so may possibly result in failure to successfully collect data logging results When the data collection condition is set to...

Страница 216: ...g the clock are made to the clock data of the CPU module during data logging the CPU module performs data collection at the specified collection interval timing but the date time column in the output file reports the changed clock data Events that are not recognized as a trigger condition For trigger logging the following events are not recognized as a trigger condition A second trigger condition ...

Страница 217: ...The data may be displayed incorrectly in a software application with no Unicode support To open a Unicode text file with multiple lines of comments in Microsoft Excel be sure to drag and drop the file on the Microsoft Excel window otherwise the content of the file may be displayed incorrectly in Microsoft Excel Registration of the available devices User device system device file register and index...

Страница 218: ...under Fixed Scan Interval Setting is too short such as 0 05ms and occurrence of I49 is specified as the data collection condition since the processing time of the interrupt program becomes longer than the set interrupt period and the END instruction cannot be executed due to the continuous execution of the interrupt program For how to reduce processing time of interrupt programs refer to Saving re...

Страница 219: ...files an SD memory card cannot be replaced during data logging file transfer Page 206 SD Memory Card Replacement If the SD memory card forced disable function is executed or the SD memory card is removed during data logging file transfer a file transfer error occurs Powering off and on or a reset operation during file transfer If the CPU module is powered off and on or is reset during data logging...

Страница 220: ...r occurs if the operation to stop data logging file transfer function is performed before logging out from the FTP server or logout fails Timing for DNS setting To enable the DNS setting the CPU module needs to be powered off and on or reset Therefore when DNS is set during logging data in the function memory is deleted if the function memory is specified as the data logging file storage destinati...

Страница 221: ...d delete unnecessary files in the function memory for the next data logging When the CPU module is in the STOP state and data logging is in the pause state When the CPU module is in the STOP state and the data logging is in the pause state data is not transferred to the data memory Turn off and on SM653 File transfer to data memory request as necessary and transfer data to the data memory again Po...

Страница 222: ...xecuted generates an error at the following timings When the data logging is being executed At writing a program file or global label setting file When the data logging is stopped or paused At the registration of the data logging after a program file or global label setting file is written For details on SD940 refer to the following Page 860 Latch area Device label specification Data required to b...

Страница 223: ... of the program and data online Page 115 Online change ladder block Memory dump function Stores device values of the CPU module at any given timing Page 221 Memory Dump Function This function cannot be used in the R00CPU 1 Perform memory dump settings 2 Enters a wait state for the trigger after the memory dump setting file has been written 3 Establishment of the trigger condition 4 Start of data c...

Страница 224: ... the value of the monitoring target data changes during a single scan if the value during the END processing is same as that during the last END processing it is not recognized as a trigger Completion bits including error completion bits used in dedicated instructions cannot be used as a trigger For monitoring data the following devices can be specified 1 A local device index modified device and i...

Страница 225: ...urrence of a continuation error that is specified as a trigger condition the same error or a continuation error has occurred again In the situation that a continuation error of 15 or more has occurred a continuation error that is specified as a trigger condition has occurred Being recognized as a trigger requires the error to be cleared At the occurrence of a stop error The occurrence timing of tr...

Страница 226: ...top error also included 1 or PAUSE state a wait state for the trigger results 1 Limited to where the trigger condition is device specification If the memory dump setting file is stored putting the CPU module back into operation powering off and on or resetting results in a wait state for the trigger The engineering tool allows the memory dump status to be checked The event history also allows chec...

Страница 227: ...minus 1K byte Effect on the scan time The greater the number of collected points the longer the scan time For the increase in scan time due to the collected points refer to the processing time Page 910 Memory dump function Partition area Remarks Device area If the total value of devices exceeds the internal buffer capacity the amount by which the internal buffer capacity is exceeded is collected a...

Страница 228: ...underscore _ is added When the memory dump function is registered the debug folder DEBUG fixed and the memory dump folder MEMDUMP fixed are created in the SD memory card The memory dump file result file is stored in the memory dump folder One folder can contain a maximum of 100 files If any file does not exist in creating a save file the file with the number 00 is created If any file already exist...

Страница 229: ...ot written Page 942 Checking the program restoration information write status After the external input output forced on off function has been executed after the registration is canceled and the program restoration information has been written the LED display follows the status of the memory dump function Memory dump status Description Trigger wait not collected A state that data is not yet collect...

Страница 230: ... the settings of CPU parameters Volume of device data 682 bytes fixed Volume of collected device data The volume of collected device data is given by the following Volume of collected device data Total number of points of bit devices 8 Total number of points of word devices 2 Total number of points of word devices 4 Volume of local device data The volume of local device data is given by the total ...

Страница 231: ...l buffer capacity setting 2 If the internal buffer capacity setting is changed to execute the subsequent function attempting to start the subsequent function results in an error The memory dump continues to function normally Function not specified in the internal buffer capacity setting If the condition Total capacity that is set in the internal buffer capacity setting Internal buffer capacity tha...

Страница 232: ...dition there When file register is specified as specification device in the condition specification After registering memory dump do not change the file name of the file registers and the block number of the file registers Doing so may result in a failure to successfully collect the memory dump results Target file File operation Behavior Memory dump setting file Write Settings that are subsequentl...

Страница 233: ...taining memory dump files do not create any files or folders using a personal computer or other device Doing so may result in deletion of files and folders Access to the SD memory card The SD memory card is so frequently accessed that a delay occurs in completing the access to the SD memory card read write ...

Страница 234: ...uilt in an SD memory card inserted into the CPU module This function cannot be used in the R00CPU R01CPU and R02CPU RnCPU RnENCPU RnPSFCPU RnPSFCPU RnSFCPU RnSFCPU RnPCPU RnPCPU Standard Safety Standard Safety Redundant Process DBSELECT DBINSERT 1234 1235 1 2 2017 4 28 15 40 30 2017 4 28 15 41 15 81 79 99 100 58 60 80 40 1 2 100 90 60 40 Read the data of product ID 2 Database Product information t...

Страница 235: ...haracters The maximum number of characters of a table name 32 single byte alphabetical characters Corresponding data type Page 233 Data type Data type that can be used in the table created by using the database access instruction Range Corresponding data type for the CPU module database access function BOOL Bit 0 1 BOOLEAN Bit WORD Unsigned 16 bit numerical value 0 to 65535 INT Unsigned 16 bit num...

Страница 236: ... type of NLSCHAR Although the data is managed as Unicode in the database of the CPU module it is converted to Shift JIS code on the device of the CPU module To input the data in the data type of WORD or DWORD to the field using the CPU module database access function the data must be within the range of WORD 0 to 65535 or DWORD 0 to 4294967295 ...

Страница 237: ...Database Connection Connects to the specified database DBOPEN P Microsoft Access Excel user created application Disconnection Disconnects from the specified database DBCLOSE P Import Imports the specified data from the specified Unicode text file to create a database DBIMPORT P Export Exports the specified data in the specified database into a Unicode text file DBEXPORT P Table Add Adds a table to...

Страница 238: ... user can change the configuration of the database by exporting it to a Unicode text file editing the file and executing the DBIMPORT P instruction to get the database back to the system Operating databases First the user must execute the DBOPEN P instruction to connect to the database which the user wants to work on Also after finishing database operation the user must execute the DBCLOSE P instr...

Страница 239: ...e number of characters is 16 the user can specify like that STRING 16 The range of the number of characters is 1 to 124 1 2 WSTRING Specify the number of characters after the colon The range of the number of characters is 1 to 124 1 Key constraint Specify the key constraint on each field using single byte alphabetical characters Between key constraints a tab must be inserted as a delimiter One of ...

Страница 240: ...escription Line break The line break code is CR LF Lines consisting of only line breaks are ignored Comment A row beginning with is regarded as a comment The maximum number of characters in a comment row is 2048 including two characters for the line break code Tab Tabs cannot be used for database names table names field names key constrains and setting values Tabs are recognized as delimiters Spac...

Страница 241: ...e the file When a Unicode text file is created using a spreadsheet software program tabs are automatically inserted by saving the file Therefore it is not necessary to insert tabs into the file in the spreadsheet software program proid1 proinfo1 proinfo2 proinfon 1 1001 1010 abcd abcd abcd efgh efgh efgh pqrs pqrs pqrs tuv Key restriction Main key Data type INT Data type STRING Number of character...

Страница 242: ...tion is executed without the DBCOMMIT P instruction or the DBROLBAK P instruction the transaction is committed during execution of the DBCLOSE P instruction 1 Execute the DBOPEN P instruction to connect to a database 2 Execute the DBTRANS P instruction to start a transaction 3 Operate the database 4 To commit the transaction execute the DBCOMMIT P instruction When committing the transaction is not...

Страница 243: ...he database access instructions can be executed while SM1498 CPU module database start up flag is on When the database is being operated by another function Before creating a database by using the DBIMPORT P instruction check that the same database is not being operated by another function If the DBIMPORT P instruction is executed specifying a name of a database in the SD memory card while the sam...

Страница 244: ...U module Set whether or not to use the CPU module database access function login name and password in the module parameter of the CPU module Page 244 Built in database access setting 2 Update of the built in database access setting in the CPU module Write the module parameter to the CPU module and then power off and on or reset the CPU module CPU Module Database Access Driver 1 Obtaining CPU Modul...

Страница 245: ...emory card storing the database folder is inserted to the CPU module powered on when SD1498 Start up status of CPU module database is 0H Whether or not the ODBC server has been started up can be checked in SD1498 Start up status of CPU module database The active ODBC server stops when The SD memory card is disabled SD memory card forced disable or the SD memory card is removed The CPU module is po...

Страница 246: ... Not Use Not Use Login Name A user name to be used for the authentication at the access to a database 1 to 31 characters 1 2 RCPU Advanced Settings Password Setting Current Password A password to be used for the authentication at the access to a database 0 to 31 characters 1 RCPU New Password A new password to be set 0 to 31 characters 1 Confirm New Password A password for confirmation The passwor...

Страница 247: ... file Only the CPUDB folder directly under the root directory can be used as the storage location of the database In the CPUDB folder store database folders only Up to 32 folders can be stored in the CPUDB folder If data other than the database folder or 33 database folders or more is stored in the CPUDB folder starting up of the ODBC server is failed and an error code is stored in SD1498 Start up...

Страница 248: ...on the supported bit of the application used with the CPU module database access function For the 64 bit OS the ODBC Data Source Administrator can be started from the following When the start up drive is C 64 bit version C WINDOWS System32 odbcad32 exe 32 bit version C WINDOWS SysWOW64 odbcad32 exe 1 Select Start Control Panel System and Security Administrative Tools Data Sources ODBC on the perso...

Страница 249: ...ion Input the comment Input none up to 1023 single byte alphanumeric characters or up to 512 double byte characters Server Set the IP address of the CPU module to be connected Port Set 61461 Default setting is 61461 Do not change the value Database Set the absolute path of the database to be connected For example input the following for the database folder my_db_vv stored in the CPUDB folder direc...

Страница 250: ...escription Application Reference Table creation Create a table in a database of the CPU module from the personal computer Microsoft Access Page 248 Creating a table by using an application Record operation Edit a database of the CPU module from the personal computer Microsoft Access Page 251 Record operation from an application Record search Search a database of the CPU module from the personal co...

Страница 251: ...nt type REAL TargetZ Numeric type Single precision floating point type REAL 3 Name the table RecipeTable and save it After saving close the table 4 Right click on RecipeTable and select Export ODBC Database 5 When the window to specify the export destination is displayed click the OK button 6 On the window for selecting the data source click the Machine Data Source tab and select the data source o...

Страница 252: ... window so click the Close button The Query Tools tab becomes enabled Select Pass Through Selecting Pass Through enables the query tab and allows input of SQL commands to be sent to the database of the CPU module directly For available SQL commands for the CPU module database access function refer to the following Page 996 List of Available SQL Commands for CPU Module Database Access Function 7 Th...

Страница 253: ... ODBC Database 2 When the window to select the method for storing the data in the database select Link to the data source by creating a linked table and click the OK button 3 On the window for selecting the data source click the Machine Data Source tab and select the data source of the CPU module When the default user is not set to the ODBC data source input the user name and password When no data...

Страница 254: ...g table select a table to be operated and click the OK button to display the contents of the table 1 Select a cell to change the value 2 Select a row to delete the record 3 Add a new record 5 When the value is changed or the record is deleted the database of the CPU module is changed according to the operation 3 2 1 ...

Страница 255: ...From Other Sources From Microsoft Query 2 On the window for selecting the data source select the data source of the CPU module When the default user is not set to the ODBC data source input the user name and password When no data source of the CPU module is displayed in the window add a database of the CPU module to the ODBC data source Page 246 Adding a database to the ODBC data source 3 On the w...

Страница 256: ...aved the search condition is also saved Click the Data tab Refresh All in Excel to acquire the data in the same condition from the database of the CPU module once more 5 On the window for setting the sort order of the query wizard set the condition to sort the output data 6 Set the output destination Then the search result is output ...

Страница 257: ...rch in the database of the CPU module using the value of the Judge field as its key and displays the acquired search result in a list and graph scatter plot 1 Specify the database source name to be connected 2 Specify the Judge field value to be searched 3 Click the Search button to search the record with the same value as the one specified by JudgeValue in the database specified by DataSource 4 T...

Страница 258: ... path 2 Database SampleDB Database name SampleDB Table name to be searched CheckData SerialNo Enduser X Y Z Judge 20170428010 A 494 500 497 1 20170428011 B 500 495 492 1 20170428012 C 493 510 510 1 20170428013 A 492 490 510 1 20170428014 B 526 502 458 0 20170428015 C 509 508 501 1 20170428016 A 484 539 498 0 20170428017 B 469 510 539 0 20170428018 C 501 499 509 1 20170428019 A 493 502 497 1 201704...

Страница 259: ...judge value specified by the combo box are acquired and displayed in a list and a scatter plot of X and Y field values summary param name sender param param name e param private void btnSearch_Click object sender EventArgs e The number of fields the number of fields on the CheckData table int len 6 Acquiring the data source name string strConnect txtDataSourceName Text ToString ODBC connection inf...

Страница 260: ...ints AddXY Convert ToInt32 dtRecord Rows recordnum Cells 2 Value Convert ToInt32 dtRecord Rows recordnum Cells 3 Value catch OdbcException ex MessageBox Show ex ToString finally Disconnecting from DB cn Close summary Generating the SQL statement from the value in the combo box summary public string GetSQL string strSQL switch cmbJudge SelectedIndex case 0 The search target is records of Judge 0 st...

Страница 261: ...uch as Microsoft Access uses several connections four applications may not connect with the database of the CPU module simultaneously If an attempt was made to connect with the database with all the connections used an error occurs in the application and the database cannot be connected In this case end unused applications connected with the database and connect again Several simultaneous accesses...

Страница 262: ...d disable databases of the CPU module cannot be accessed The error code is stored in SD1498 To access the databases of the CPU module again insert the SD memory card and power off and on or reset the CPU module Free space of the SD memory card To use the CPU module database access function the SD memory card must have at least 20MB of free space When the free space of the SD memory card becomes 20...

Страница 263: ...ollowing MELSEC iQ R Programming Manual CPU Module Instructions Standard Functions Function Blocks Errors detected by the personal computer When an error occurs during the access to the database of the CPU module the CPU module returns the error message to the personal computer In this case check the error message displayed on the personal computer and eliminate the cause of the error The error ca...

Страница 264: ... a process value PV is to be equivalent to a set value SV A larger difference between the process value PV and set value SV results in a faster speed to reach the set value SV quickly by increasing the manipulated value MV and a smaller difference between the process value PV and set value SV results in a slower speed to reach the set value SV accurately by decreasing the manipulated value MV The ...

Страница 265: ...ts using various types of function block provided for the process control Since the initial value of the function block can be set in the FB Property window of the engineering tool the program for the initial value setting is not required An argument of a function block can be specified using a label without considering the address of a device The execution status of a tag FB can be checked and co...

Страница 266: ...added to the existing control loop which consists of multiple process control instructions as an option Configuration of safety system Alarms are automatically detected in the system Auto tuning The auto tuning instruction automatically calculates PID constants that are most suitable for the control system When the process control function is used the process control by the process control functio...

Страница 267: ...unction check the versions of the CPU module and engineering tool used Page 1008 Added and Enhanced Functions This function cannot be used in the R00CPU R01CPU and R02CPU Function Reference Backup function Backup processing triggered by turning on SM1351 Page 272 Backup processing triggered by turning on SM1351 Automatic backup using SD944 Page 273 Automatic backup using SD944 Restoration function...

Страница 268: ...digits Depends on the capacity of the SD memory card used 2 Folders for storing information per backup data Each backup data created on a date is stored in sequentially numbered folders 5 Drive folder Drive0 Fixed Drive3 Fixed and Drive4 Fixed One set of the folders in a number folder Folders for storing folders files stored in each drive of the backup target CPU module by each drive 6 System file...

Страница 269: ...up data that can be stored in an SD memory card The number of CPU module backup data that can be stored in an SD memory card is 32767 This number is equal to the maximum number of storable folders The number of files that can be backed up and restored the number of backup source data files depends on the maximum number of files of each model or drive File type Backup restoration Program FB file CP...

Страница 270: ...Retentive timer ST 3 3 Long timer LT 3 3 Long retentive timer LST 3 3 Counter C 3 3 Long counter LC 3 3 Data register D 3 3 Link register W Link special register SW Latch relay L System device Function input FX Function output FY Function register FD Special relay SM 1 2 Special register SD 1 2 Link direct device Link input Jn X Link output Jn Y Link relay Jn B Link special relay Jn SB Link regist...

Страница 271: ...h the special register 1 When program files are restored the progress in SD1351 stops while data is being written to the program memory in the restoration processing because the data is transferred from the program cache memory to the program memory The progress of data transfer to the program memory can be checked in SD629 Program memory write transfer status Classification Backup 2 Restoration 2...

Страница 272: ...t status for the number of CPU module backup data When the bit 5 of SD944 is turned off no upper limit value setting is applied If data folders are created more than the capacity of the SD memory card before the number of them reaches the upper limit value for the number of CPU module backup data the backup processing is completed with an error and the data cannot be backed up to reach the upper l...

Страница 273: ...44 Enable the upper limit value for the number of CPU module backup data is turned on and enable the upper limit value for the number of CPU module backup data The backup processing has not been executed when no backup data folder CPU data folder exists in the SD memory card The value set in SD1353 Upper limit value setting for the number of CPU module backup data is within the range 1 to 100 1 Th...

Страница 274: ...g the upper limit value for the number of CPU module backup data 2 Turn on SM1351 CPU module data backup execution request If the backup processing is completed with an error and SM953 CPU module data backup error check flag turns on check SD953 Backup error cause take actions and then back up the data again as required The execution status of the backup processing can be checked in SD1350 Number ...

Страница 275: ... SD944 Execution timing Bit 0 On On the time set in SD948 and SD949 on the day set in SD947 Bit 1 On On the time set in SD950 and SD951 on the day of the week set to SD952 Bit 15 On When a stop error has occurred in the CPU module Special relay Special register Description SM961 This relay turns on when the retry of the automatic backup is completed with an error after the retry of the automatic b...

Страница 276: ... time and day of the week are specified Data is automatically backed up on the specified time on the specified day of the week 1 Set the upper limit value for the number of CPU module backup data The setting method and operating procedure for the upper limit value are the same as those for the upper limit value for the backup processing triggered by turning on SM1351 Page 272 Operating procedure 2...

Страница 277: ...cessing Do not perform the following operations during execution of the backup processing Removing and inserting the SD memory card Powering off or resetting the CPU module The above mentioned operations leave the backup data in the SD memory card in an incomplete state which is middle of the backup processing Do not use these data for a restoration If these data are used the restoration is comple...

Страница 278: ...any files to which file passwords have been set exist in the CPU module the files are not backed up Security key authentication function Locked programs are backed up in the locked state regardless of whether security keys have been written or not Timing for setting the upper limit value for the number of CPU module backup data Set the upper limit value for the number of CPU module backup data bef...

Страница 279: ...lder name Online change online change ladder block Event history function Clearing event history File password function Security key authentication function Writing deleting a security key to in the CPU module Predefined protocol support function Writing protocol setting data Memory dump function Registering clearing memory dump Operation using the CPU module logging configuration tool Data loggin...

Страница 280: ...cified for the data storage destination memory in the data logging function the function memory is cleared after the CPU module is powered off or the RESET state is cleared Thus data logging files are also cleared To prevent data logging files from being lost back up the files after the completion of file transfer by the data logging file transfer function ...

Страница 281: ...ter with the bit 14 of SD955 The following special relay register areas which are used for the CPU module data backup restoration function will not be restored even though bit14 of SD955 is on SM953 SM959 SM961 SM1350 SM1351 SM1353 SM1354 SM1356 SD953 SD959 SD1350 SD1351 SD1353 Special register Description Bit 13 of SD955 Set the restoration function setting with bit patterns Off Data specified wi...

Страница 282: ...RUN values of devices are changed according to the operation of the device memory at an operating status change of the CPU module Page 88 Operation Processing When Operating Status Is Changed Item Operation setting after restoration Operating the CPU module in the status at data backup bit 15 of SD955 On Operating the CPU module in the initial status bit 15 of SD955 Off Device initial value The de...

Страница 283: ...et number folder setting These settings are not required when the bit 13 of SD955 Restoration function setting is on 3 Set each setting with the bit 13 to 15 of SD955 4 Set the CPU module to the STOP state 5 Turn on SM1354 If the restoration processing is completed with an error and SM959 CPU module data restoration error check flag turns on check SD959 Restoration error cause take actions and the...

Страница 284: ...pleted with an error and SM959 CPU module data restoration error check flag turns on check SD959 Restoration error cause take actions and then restore the data again as required Since the special register set for the automatic restoration is a latch area setting data is held SD955 holds its setting even after the CPU module is powered on or is reset Thus if the CPU module is powered on or is reset...

Страница 285: ...xternal devices have been set in the CPU module For the CPU module with firmware version 24 or earlier the restoration cannot be executed if labels accessible from external devices have been set in the CPU module by access label settings from external devices Check that no such labels have been set in the CPU module and then execute the restoration processing For the CPU module with firmware versi...

Страница 286: ...witched to the RUN state the CPU module may not operate with the backup data In that case power on or reset the CPU module For device label data since device label data except for latch specified devices labels is initialized when the CPU module is powered on or is reset restore the device label data again as required Abnormal completion of restoration Since the restoration processing will be comp...

Страница 287: ...sing Automatic restoration using SD955 When the restoration processing is executed Operations and functions that cannot be performed While the following operations or functions are being executed the restoration processing cannot be executed The following operations and functions cannot be executed during execution of the restoration processing Operation or function Operation from the engineering ...

Страница 288: ...ing on SM1354 cannot be executed during execution of the restoration processing The latter restoration processing is ignored When the CPU module database access function is used When the data is backed up with the CPU module data backup restoration function and restored by turning on SM1354 while using the CPU module database access function power off and on or reset the CPU module regardless of t...

Страница 289: ...the restoration processing is completed successfully In this case data allocation in the CPU module is different Therefore an error occurs when the CPU module is powered off and on or is reset or the module operating status is changed from STOP to RUN after the restoration processing When the data backed up using the CPU module with the new data allocation is restored to the CPU module with the co...

Страница 290: ...rformed before CPU modules enter into the RUN state e g setting of initial device label values the configuration of system parameters and CPU parameters e g the number of programs to run When diagnostics of the SD memory card is performed due to operation such as power off during access to the SD memory card the startup time of the multiple CPU system may be slowed Create a program so that only on...

Страница 291: ...nchronization function Precautions An error is not detected in reading input DX for the non controlled module and buffer memory of the intelligent function module Communication method Access target Access range When Import is selected in the settings for out of group I O fetch When Not Imported is selected in the settings for out of group I O fetch Communication through refresh Input X Read to ano...

Страница 292: ...assigned to the output portion area not used are not fetched On Off state is maintained Input X cannot be fetched from the Q series modules Fetching output Y When Import is selected for Output Status Outside Group in I O Setting Outside Group the output refresh before the start of the program operation fetches On Off data output to the output module and or intelligent function module controlled by...

Страница 293: ...ules under its control by using link direct devices Non controlled modules cannot be accessed 16 2 Operation Settings This section describes the operation settings of the multiple CPU system function Stop setting An operating status whether to stop the operation of all the CPU modules or not if a major or moderate error occurs in any of the CPU modules is set System Parameter Multiple CPU Setting ...

Страница 294: ...us Startup Setting Window Displayed items Group setting for the synchronized start up is available For example a setting in which only CPUs No 1 and No 2 start synchronously within a multiple CPU system with four CPU modules is possible If a reserved empty CPU is specified to synchronize it is skipped and the other CPUs in the group start synchronously This setting is designed to access to each CP...

Страница 295: ...eration processing synchronously Program Execution type Description Program to synchronize the start of operation processing Scan This is a program used to synchronize the start of operation processing across all CPU modules This program must be specified as one for running at the beginning of the scan execution type of program Also when all the CPU modules are ready to start operation processing ...

Страница 296: ... the operation processing is ready to be started after a flag that indicates the operation start turns on this flag turns off M1 Flag that indicates an operation start this flag turns on for only one scan U3En G2048 The synchronization counter of each CPU module n 0 CPU No 1 n 1 CPU No 2 n 2 CPU No 3 n 3 CPU No 4 D2 to D9 The storage location for values of the synchronization counter of each CPU m...

Страница 297: ...idually for each CPU they will be overwritten Therefore simply setting up the clock data for CPU No 1 allows to manipulate a unified clock data across the entire multiple CPU system Page 108 Time Setting As with clock data the same settings as those for CPU No 1 apply to CPU Nos 2 to 4 Time zone setting Page 110 Setting Time Zone Daylight saving time setting Page 111 Daylight Saving Time Function ...

Страница 298: ...ed scan communication setting is configured will compare the parameters with those of the CPU of the lowest number Inter module synchronization setting Checking is not conducted by the CPU module of the number for which the Inter module synchronization setting is not configured The CPU module of the number for which the Inter module synchronization setting is configured will compare the parameters...

Страница 299: ...the fixed scan communication area send area of the host CPU module The CPU module for receiving data reads data from the fixed scan communication area receive area of the host CPU module of the send source CPU module Memory Communication method Description Area size CPU buffer memory Communication through direct access This area is used to read write data to the areas of the host CPU module or oth...

Страница 300: ...o the CPU buffer memory TO U3E0 K2052 D0 K4 2 The CPU module assures a 64 bit data integrity and write the data to the CPU buffer memory TO U3E0 K2056 D4 K4 3 The CPU module assures a 64 bit data integrity and read the data from the CPU buffer memory FROM U3E0 K2052 D100 K4 4 The CPU module assures a 64 bit data integrity and read the data from the CPU buffer memory FROM U3E0 K2056 D104 K4 D4 D0 G...

Страница 301: ...ings System Parameter Multiple CPU Setting Communication Setting between CPUs CPU Buffer Memory Setting Detailed Setting Window Displayed items Item Description Setting range Default Set button of each refresh area This menu item sets up the refresh settings used for data communication between CPU modules The settings are linked with the refresh settings of CPU parameter 0 points Send Receive Dire...

Страница 302: ...e System Parameter Multiple CPU Setting Communication Setting between CPUs Fixed Scan Communication Area Setting Window Displayed items 1 The max area size that can be set through setting of the fixed scan communication area differs depending on the fixed scan communication cycle Item Description Setting range Default Fixed Scan Communication Function Specify whether or not the fixed scan communic...

Страница 303: ...PU module does not send data to the other CPU modules although send areas have been reserved This CPU module does not receive data from the other CPU modules 1 Send area of CPU No 1 Send area of CPU No 2 Receive area of CPU No 1 Send area of CPU No 3 Receive area of CPU No 1 Send area of CPU No 4 Receive area of CPU No 1 Send area of CPU No 2 Send area of CPU No 3 Send area of CPU No 4 Fixed scan ...

Страница 304: ...he CPU modules in a multiple CPU system some data writing timing may lead to a failure of the complete data communication in the fixed scan communication cycle after the data writing and data inconsistency may occur In this setting set whether to detect a continuation error or not in this case Page 128 Error detection setting Item Description Setting range Default 0 05ms Unit Setting Specify wheth...

Страница 305: ...scan Third scan 10th scan 11th scan 50th scan 51st scan 100th scan 101st scan 102nd scan Value Scan First scan Value CPU No 1 CPU No 2 CPU No 3 Scan First scan Second scan Third scan 10th scan 11th scan 50th scan 51st scan 100th scan 101st scan 102nd scan Value Device memory CPU buffer memory Data change when the CPU module unit guarantee is enabled Device memory Device memory Device memory Scan F...

Страница 306: ...between CPUs PLC Unit Data Window Displayed items For communications by the direct access with the CPU buffer memory other than the fixed scan communication area data is not guaranteed on a module by module basis even when this setting is enabled because the data on the CPU buffer memory of other CPU modules is directly read after execution of the read instruction Data send receive timing coincide...

Страница 307: ...terrupt program I45 does not exist on the program The following figure shows the timing of each refresh Refresh timing Application Memory to be used At the END processing For data communication of devices in synchronization with the scan CPU buffer memory At the execution of multiple CPU synchronous interrupt program I45 1 2 For data communication of devices at the period specified in the fixed sc...

Страница 308: ...urn reads the transferred data into the device Ex When CPU No 1 refreshes 32 points B0 to B1F and CPU No 2 refreshes 32 points B20 to B3F CPU No 1 CPU No 2 CPU buffer memory CPU buffer memory Refresh area Refresh area Write with END processing of CPU No 1 Write with END processing of CPU No 2 Read with END processing of CPU No 2 Read with END processing of CPU No 1 Device B0 to B1F for CPU No 1 B2...

Страница 309: ...setting Data number of points Data number of points can be configured within the number of points assigned to the area within the send range of the fixed scan communication area in increments of two points Device duplication between multiple setting numbers is not allowed Data that can be specified The device other than local device can be specified However when Use File Register of Each Program i...

Страница 310: ... refresh behavior When the refresh timing coincides with the period specified in the fixed scan communication setting the refresh behavior depends on the operating status of the CPU module 1 In the disabling interrupt state by the DI instruction the refresh is not operational because the multiple CPU synchronous interrupt program I45 does not work Refresh Setting between Multiple CPUs window 1 Cli...

Страница 311: ...U modules are transferred using any area on the CPU buffer memory FROM TO instruction DFROM DTO instruction Instruction using the CPU buffer memory access device U3En G Communication using the fixed scan communication area Data between CPU modules are transferred using the fixed scan communication area Instruction using the CPU buffer memory access device U3En HG Communication by a dedicated instr...

Страница 312: ...read instruction Unlike the refresh data registered during the instruction execution can be directly read Ex When data written to the CPU buffer memory on the CPU No 1 using the write instruction is read by CPU No 2 using the read instruction Area Description CPU buffer memory All the CPU buffer memory area except for the refresh area is available The start address of the available area for each C...

Страница 313: ...0 D100 1 2 3 CPU No 1 CPU No 2 CPU buffer memory CPU buffer memory Fixed scan communication area of CPU No 1 Refresh area Fixed scan communication area of CPU No 2 Execution of a write instruction Write using a write instruction The data is transferred at multiple CPU communication cycle The send data is transferred to CPU No 2 Fixed scan communication area of CPU No 1 Refresh area Refresh area Re...

Страница 314: ... in the refresh settings Ex Interlock program in communication by refresh Parameter settings Program example CPU No 1 refresh setting Direction CPU No 2 refresh setting CPU No Transfer No Send receive range for each CPU module Send receive device setting CPU No Transfer No Send receive range for each CPU module Send receive device setting Number of points start end start end Number of points start...

Страница 315: ...creates send data 2 CPU No 1 turns on the data setting complete bit Data transfer with CPU No 2 END processing 3 CPU No 2 detects send data setting complete 4 CPU No 2 performs receive data processing 5 CPU No 2 turns on receive data processing complete Data transfer with CPU No 1 END processing 6 CPU No 1 detects receive data processing complete and turns off the data setting complete bit Data tr...

Страница 316: ...ta with two or more words to the CPU buffer memory data is written from the end address to the start address If combining and writing send data with interlock signals with a single instruction data inconsistency can be prevented with an interlock signal at the start of the data 1 CPU No 1 creates send data 2 CPU No 1 turns on the data setting complete bit Data transfer with multiple CPU communicat...

Страница 317: ...te the other CPU modules which are not in stop error state keep data stored before the stop error occurs 1 This item indicates data transfer between user devices and the fixed scan communication area on the host CPU module 2 This item indicates data communication between the fixed scan communication areas on the host CPU module and other CPU modules 3 When an error occurs during normal operation n...

Страница 318: ...nous interrupt program is executed Data sending of other CPU modules refresh Data to be sent to other CPU modules is written from a device or a label Data is written to the send area of the host CPU module Ò Ó Ô Ò Ó Ô Ò Ó Ô Ò Ó Ô CPU module CPU No 1 Multiple CPU synchronous interrupt program Refresh Operation processing Refresh Pause Normal program Multiple CPU synchronous interrupt program Send d...

Страница 319: ...ccessfully in the next fixed scan communication cycle select Detect for Program Execution Section Exceed I45 in RAS Setting of CPU Parameter Page 128 Error detection setting With this setting when data is written after the host CPU module starts data transfer in the multiple CPU synchronous interrupt program SM484 Execution section excess error flag for multiple CPU synchronization interrupt progr...

Страница 320: ...key has been registered Security key authentication function Restricts access to projects on the personal computer with a combination of user name and password The security level can be set individually for each user User authentication function CPU module Prevents unauthorized execution of programs A security key is used Programs locked with a security key can only be executed at modules for whic...

Страница 321: ... cannot be viewed and edited We assume no responsibility whatsoever for any damage or loss to the user and any other individual or organization resulting from such a situation Therefore the user needs to take adequate measures as shown below Import the registered security key to another personal computer Export the registered security key to a file and store the file in a safe place The following ...

Страница 322: ...umber of points that can be collected for a CPU module For details on the function using the sequence scan synchronization sampling function and collectable data for each module refer to the manual for the module used Manual for the module used Precautions Use points in 8K point increments to use all of the total number of points that can be collected The points are assigned in 8K point increments...

Страница 323: ...18 SEQUENCE SCAN SYNCHRONIZATION SAMPLING FUNCTION 321 18 MEMO ...

Страница 324: ...ld reassign the data again This function is supported by the Process CPU and SIL2 Process CPU Before using this function with the Process CPU check the versions of the CPU module and engineering tool used Page 1008 Added and Enhanced Functions Label initialization operation The following table lists the label initialization operations 1 The labels whose attributes are other than CONSTANT to be ass...

Страница 325: ... initialized only when the data is written to the programmable controller for the first time after data is rebuilt reassigned To write the same project to other programmable controller rebuild reassign the data again before writing Precautions The following describes precautions on this function Even though SM326 SFC device label clear mode is on device label values are kept only labels are initia...

Страница 326: ...bling label initial values to be set when the operating status of the CPU module is switched from STOP to RUN 1 Check that Label Initial Value Reflection Setting has been set to Disable Page 325 Setting method 2 Write data to the programmable controller 3 Set the CPU module to the RUN state Label initial values are not set 1 1 Initial values are set when the CPU module is powered on or the operati...

Страница 327: ... been set to Disable Thus set this setting to Enable to perform the same operation as the one performed by the programmable controller CPU Precautions The following describes precautions on the label initial value reflection setting If the battery runs out and latch type labels cannot be kept at a power failure values in the labels are cleared when the CPU module is powered off Thus initial values...

Страница 328: ...ing during operation setting made by the S P RTWRITE instruction is cleared when the CPU module is powered off or reset Also the S P RTREAD instruction can be used to read setting details of the parameters For details on these instructions refer to the following MELSEC iQ R Programming Manual CPU Module Instructions Standard Functions Function Blocks Item Description Setting range Default Relay St...

Страница 329: ...tion Destination station Network No Station No Network No 1 3 3 The data is transferred to the relay station 2 of the own network to go to the network No 3 Destination station Relay station Network No Station No Network No 2 6 3 The data is transferred to the relay station 4 of the own network to go to the network No 3 The data has been transferred to the network No 3 and is to be transferred to 6...

Страница 330: ...328 20 ROUTING SETTING 20 3 Precautions MEMO ...

Страница 331: ...329 PART 3 PART 3 DEVICES LABELS AND CONSTANTS This part consists of the following chapters 21 DEVICES 22 LABELS 23 LATCH FUNCTION 24 DEVICE LABEL INITIAL VALUE SETTINGS 25 CONSTANTS ...

Страница 332: ...s Decimal System Device Bit Function input FX 16 points Unchangeable Hexadecimal Bit Function output FY 16 points Hexadecimal Word Function register FD 5 points 4 words Decimal Bit Special relay SM 4K points Decimal Word Special register SD 4K points Decimal Link Direct Device Bit Link input Jn X 16384 points Max 1 Unchangeable Hexadecimal Bit Link output Jn Y 16384 points Max 1 Hexadecimal Bit Li...

Страница 333: ...points Data register D 12K points SFC block device BL 128 points 21 2 Device Setting The number of points of each user device can be changed Page 333 User Device CPU Parameter Memory Device Setting Device Label Memory Area Detailed Setting Device Setting Detail Setting Window Pointer Pointer P 8192 points 2 Changeable Page 363 Pointer setting Decimal Interrupt pointer I 1024 points Unchangeable De...

Страница 334: ... Enhanced Functions Type Device name Symbol Range of use 1 Increment of setting Bit Input X X0 to X2FFF Bit Output Y Y0 to Y2FFF Bit Internal relay M M0 to M161882111 64 points Bit Link relay B B0 to B9A61FFF 64 points Bit Annunciator F F0 to F32767 64 points Bit Link special relay SB SB0 to SB9A61FFF 64 points Bit Edge relay V V0 to V32767 64 points Bit Step relay 2 S S0 to S16383 1024 points Wor...

Страница 335: ...t for the Xn are used Also the input can be used as a target re flesh CPU module side device of the remote input RX such as the CC Link IE Field Network Output Y This device outputs the control results of the program to various devices such as external signal light digital HMI electromagnetic switch contactor solenoid 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 A B C E D F 6 0 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 A B C E D F 6 Push butto...

Страница 336: ...odule and the link relay LB of the network module such as the CC Link IE Controller Network module The refresh range is specified using parameters on the network module The part which is not used for refreshing can be used for other applications Annunciator F This device is an internal relay used for a customer created program which detects malfunction failure of the equipment When the annunciator...

Страница 337: ...ed on 1 The annunciator numbers turned on are stored sequentially into SD64 to SD79 2 The annunciator number stored into SD64 is stored into SD62 3 SD63 value Number of annunciators is incremented by one Operations when annunciators are turned off 1 The number of the annunciator deactivated is removed and the numbers of annunciators which were lined up behind the removed one move forward one by on...

Страница 338: ...n the 18th device 6 Turn off the first device Link special relay SB The communication status and error detection status of network modules such as the CC Link IE Controller Network module are output to the link special relay J SB on the network The link special relay SB is a device for using as a refreshing target of link special relays in the network The part which is not used for refreshing can ...

Страница 339: ...pecifying SFC program steps This device is also used when specifying step No through such methods as verifying monitor current value changes SFC programs with SFC control instructions or the engineering tool MELSEC iQ R Programming Manual Program Design 1 When X1 is rising this device is turned on for one scan duration SM400 X0Z1 V0Z1 SM400 1 1 MOV K0 Z1 FOR K10 M0Z1 INC Z1 NEXT Return to the FOR ...

Страница 340: ...e is from 0 to about 11 9 hours The current value of the long timers is updated by adding a difference of the counter which is used in the system when the OUT LT instruction is executed Proper time can be measured even when the coil instruction of the long timer cannot be executed once per scanning because the counters used in the system count asynchronously with scanning When the long timer coil ...

Страница 341: ...n time is up the contact is turned on The current value and the contact on off state is retained even when the long retentive timer coil is turned off When the coil is turned on again measurement starts with the retained current value To clear the long retentive timer current value and turn off the contact issue the RST LST instruction The long retentive timer LST can be used in interrupt programs...

Страница 342: ...Related Setting Timer Limit Setting Window Displayed items Timer current value and the measurable range This sections describes the timer current value and the measurable range Timer T ST The current value range is 0 to 32767 The measurable time range is from 0 to timer time limit value 32767 Long timer LT LST The setting range of the current value is 0 to 4294967295 which is the same as the range...

Страница 343: ...Ex Timer limit setting 10ms setting value of T0 8 10ms 8 80ms scan time 25ms 1 Accuracy from when the coil of the timer turns on until when the contact of the timer turns on 1 scan time timer limit setting to 1 scan time 2 Timing on when the coil of the timer turns on 3 Input fetching timing X0 T0 K8 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON 3 2 3 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 25ms 25ms 25ms 25ms 25ms 25m...

Страница 344: ...ded 2 13 12 3 5 The result of Ct Cp is added 3 15 13 5 Tp time duration from the long timer coil activation to long timer contact activation Ts setting value of the long timer Tu time limit value of the long timer M1 M0 K5 LT0 LT0 ON ON 10 11 12 13 14 10 12 0 2 15 13 3 15 5 ON ON 16 17 1 2 3 4 5 1 1 M0 LT0 coil LT0 contact M1 Previous count value of LT0 Cp Current value of LT0 Counter used in syst...

Страница 345: ...l only once for each scanning operation while the coil of the timer e g T1 is turned on Otherwise proper measurement is impossible The timer cannot be used in the initial execution type program the fixed scan execution type program or the event execution type program where the occurrence of an interrupt is set to be a trigger The timer can be used in standby type programs if the coil of timer OUT ...

Страница 346: ... one word for each point The measurable range is 0 to 65535 Long counter LC This device uses two words for each point The measurable range is 0 to 429467295 The long counter LC can be used in interrupt programs Page 67 Interrupt Program Counting process When executing the counter coil OUT C instruction OUT LC instruction the counter coil is turned on off the current value is updated count value 1 ...

Страница 347: ...nt value resetting and turn off the contact issue the RST C RST LC instruction When executing the RST C instruction the counter value is cleared and the contact is turned off 1 The count value is cleared and the contact turns off X0 RST C0 X0 OFF OFF 1 1 ON END END END RST C0 RST C0 RST C0 Ladder example Reset timing of the counter Program Execution RST C0 instruction ...

Страница 348: ...losed contact of the execution condition for the OUT C0 instruction into the execution condition for the RST C0 instruction to prevent C0 coil from being turned off while the execution condition M0 of the OUT C0 instruction is turned on as shown in the following ladder example Maximum counting speed for counters Counting is possible only when on off time of the input condition is longer than the e...

Страница 349: ...cified using parameters on the network module The part which is not used for refreshing can be used for other applications Link special register SW Word data information on the communication status and error detection status of a network such as CC Link IE Controller Network are output into the link special register J SW on the network The link special register SW is a device for using as a refres...

Страница 350: ...all source Operation results are stored into the device specified in the subroutine program with argument passing The bit data specification device other than the CPU module input X are available Function register FD This device is used for writing reading between the subroutine call source and the subroutine program The input output condition of the function register is automatically identified b...

Страница 351: ...s stored Page 833 List of Special Register Areas 21 5 Link Direct Device This device directly accesses link relays and or link registers of the network module in the CC Link IE Controller Network and or CC Link IE Field Network Specification method Specify a link direct device as shown below The link register 10 W10 of the network number 2 can be specified as J2 W10 For bit devices digit specifica...

Страница 352: ... read from all the range of link devices of the network module There is only one network module for which writing reading is allowed with the link direct device for each network number When more than one network module with the same network number is mounted the network module with the lowest slot number is the target for writing reading by the link direct device Difference from link refresh The f...

Страница 353: ...le point of the program using the FROM TO instruction When data is written using more than one module access device When data is written at a single point of the program using the TO instruction 1 Store data to devices such as the data register D 2 Write data to only one point in the program Specified item Value to be specified Un Start I O number of intelligent function modules Upper two digits w...

Страница 354: ...ule the target memory is the buffer memory or link device When the data is transferred from the module to the CPU module the target memory is the specified device of the CPU module 21 7 CPU Buffer Memory Access Device This device accesses memory used by the built in function of the CPU module such as data writing reading between CPU modules on the multiple CPU system and Ethernet function Page 309...

Страница 355: ...he 16 bit index modification is 32768 to 32767 Ex Modifying D0 with Z0 32 bit index modification The device number is modified using the long index register LZ The modification range for the device in the case of the 32 bit index modification is 2147483648 to 2147483647 Ex Modifying D0 with LZ0 In addition 32 bit index modification with ZZ expression using two index registers is also available 1 A...

Страница 356: ...B F SB V S 4 T 1 LT 1 ST 1 LST 1 C 1 LC 1 D W SW SM SD Jn X Jn Y Jn B Jn SB Jn W Jn SW Un G U3En G U3En HG R ZR RD P 3 I 3 BLn S 4 J U K H 32 bit index modification M B SB T 1 LT 1 ST 1 LST 1 C 1 LC 1 D W SW Jn B 2 Jn W 2 Un G 2 U3En G 2 U3En HG 2 R ZR RD K H Item Description Setting range Default Number of points setting Total Points Check the total number of points for index register and long in...

Страница 357: ...n P instruction is not available Page 337 Edge relay V Index modification by the CALL instruction In the CALL instruction pulse output is provided through the edge relay V However pulse output by the PLS PLF or pulse conversion P instruction is not available Page 337 Edge relay V Device range check for index modification For details on the device range check when index modification is performed re...

Страница 358: ...67 Therefore when values within the range from 32768 to 65535 are stored in the index register Z for an instruction which processes unsigned data the instruction does not work in design because the range of the index modification will be 32768 to 32767 For the range of values larger than or equal to 32768 the long index register LZ must be used so that 32 bit based index modification can be applie...

Страница 359: ... as the device symbol The range of R is from R0 to R32767 However in the following cases the upper limit of the device number is block size unit word 1 The file register file size is smaller than 64K bytes The file register file size is not a multiple of 64K bytes and the end block is specified in the RSET instruction Serial number method In this method file registers having more than 32K points a...

Страница 360: ...Window Displayed items Precautions To access the CPU module from either of the following modules or engineering tools the size of the file register needs to be 5696K words or less with an extended SRAM cassette NZ2MC 16MBS of 16MB C Controller module MES interface module GOT2000 when the programmable controller program monitor R ladder is used Engineering tool version 1 015R or earlier CPU Module ...

Страница 361: ...assigned into the refresh memory area Page 98 Refresh memory Refresh memory setting CPU Parameter Memory Device Setting Refresh Memory Setting Window Displayed items Item Description Setting range Default Total Points Check the total number of points for the refresh data register and the assigned area 1024K Point Refresh Data Register RD area Set the number of points of refresh data register 0 to ...

Страница 362: ... using opening closing the common rail of the ladders M15 N0 B C A M15 N0 MC M16 N1 MC N2 MCR N1 MCR M17 N2 MC N0 MCR M16 N1 M17 N2 Control range of the nesting N0 Control range of the nesting N1 Control range of the nesting N2 Specify the nesting in ascending order Execute when the condition A is satisfied Execute when the condition A and B are satisfied Specify the nesting in descending order Ex...

Страница 363: ...ns such as the CALL instruction Global pointer This is the pointer which enables calling by the subroutine call instruction from all the program being executed Effective use of number of points The number of points for global pointers can be obtained with the following formula pointer number of points specified by the parameter the total point number of local pointer being used for each program Pr...

Страница 364: ...y uses only P99 100 points P0 to P99 are considered to be used When using local pointers in multiple programs they can be effectively used by using them in ascending order from P0 in each program group 1 The local pointers with the same number can be used between different programs CALL P0 CALL P1 CALL P0 CALL P1 FEND FEND RET RET RET RET P0 P0 P1 P1 1 Program 1 Program 2 Program A P0 to P99 are u...

Страница 365: ...e is used as a label located at the head of the interrupt program This pointer can be used in all the programs being executed Setting the execution type of program to the event execution type eliminates the need to write I the interrupt pointer Page 59 Interrupt occurrence by the interrupt pointer I Item Description Setting range Default Global Pointer Start Set the start number of the global poin...

Страница 366: ...r module synchronization function Multiple CPU synchronous interrupt I45 This fixed scan interrupt pointer is used in the multiple CPU synchronization function High speed internal timer interrupt 2 I48 This interrupt pointer is used in fixed scan interrupts by the internal timer and can be specified in a shorter interval than interrupt pointer numbers I28 to I31 High speed internal timer interrupt...

Страница 367: ...on MELSEC iQ R Programming Manual Module Dedicated Instructions 21 16 SFC Block Device BL This device is used when specifying SFC program blocks This device is also used when specifying step No through such methods as verifying monitor current value changes SFC programs with SFC control instructions or the engineering tool MELSEC iQ R Programming Manual Program Design 21 17 SFC Transition Device T...

Страница 368: ... devices Internal relay M Edge relay V Timer T LT ST LST Counter C LC Data register D Pointer P Because the index register Z LZ saves returns during program execution it should be regarded separately as the local index register unlike other local devices Page 353 Index Register Z LZ Local device area The CPU module reserves the local device area on the device label memory based on the number of po...

Страница 369: ...program an event execution type program triggered by occurrence of an interrupt turn on SM777 Local device setting in interrupt programs The programs will not function properly if SM777 is turned off For the SIL2 Process CPU and Safety CPU however the on off setting of SM777 does not affect those programs Page 680 SM777 setting Page 558 SM777 setting Ex Operation if SM777 turned on in following se...

Страница 370: ...m file because it is enabled for each CPU module When the local device monitor is executed the monitor switches to the applicable local device Consequently if SM777 is off when an interrupt occurs immediately after switching and a local device is accessed the local device being monitored by the local device monitor is used The local device for the program being run prior to the interrupt program i...

Страница 371: ...ber of local devices used A 16 B C 2 D 4 E 2 16 F A Number of points of the local devices M and V B Number of points of the local devices D T current value ST current value and C current value C Number of points of the local device LC current value D Number of points of the local devices LT and LST E Number of points of the local devices T contact coil ST contact coil C contact coil and LC contact...

Страница 372: ...ction describes the precautions when using local devices Like global devices the timer T LT ST LST and counter C LC specified as a local device cannot be checked for the device range Therefore when operates the address in the index modification or indirect specification be careful not to exceed the specified device range Accessing the range including both global and local devices by the index modi...

Страница 373: ...the file register is switched specify the ADRSET instruction to obtain the indirect address again after block or file are switched Devices that can allow indirect specification This section lists devices that can allow indirect specification 1 Also can be used for the local device e g D0 2 The indirect address of device can be obtained for the local device as well e g ADRSET D0 D100 3 Devices that...

Страница 374: ...ted by the engineering tool from the module used and can be used as a global label For details refer to the following Function Block Reference for the module used 22 1 Global Labels A global label is a label that provides the same data within a single project It can be used in all programs in the project A global label can be used in program blocks and function blocks The settings of a global labe...

Страница 375: ...ared POU This label cannot be used in other POUs VAR_CONSTANT A constant that can be used within the range of a declared POU This label cannot be used in other POUs VAR_RETAIN A latch type label that can be used within the range of a declared POU This label cannot be used in other POUs VAR_INPUT A label that inputs a value into a function or function block This label receives a value and the recei...

Страница 376: ...ve and negative double precision integer values 2147483648 to 2147483647 32 bits Single precision real number 1 REAL Numerical values of decimal places single precision real number values 2128 to 2 126 0 2 126 to 2128 E 3 402823 38 to E 1 175495 38 0 E1 175495 38 to E3 402823 38 32 bits Double precision real number 1 LREAL Numerical values of decimal places double precision real number values 2102...

Страница 377: ...ng 16 bits Indicates the current value The operation is the same as the current value STN of a retentive timer device 0 to 65535 1 Long timer LTIMER S Bit Indicates a contact The operation is the same as the contact LTS of a long timer device 0 FALSE 1 TRUE C Bit Indicates a coil The operation is the same as the coil LTC of a long timer device 0 FALSE 1 TRUE N Double word unsigned bit string 32 bi...

Страница 378: ...the function block follows the local label setting within the function block The initial value of the structure type follows that of the structure definition Global label Class Definable data type Initial value setting possibility VAR_GLOBAL Primitive data type array structure function block VAR_GLOBAL_CONSTANT Primitive data type 1 2 VAR_GLOBAL_RETAIN Primitive data type 1 array structure Local l...

Страница 379: ...neering tool bLabel3 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 3 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 4 0 0 4 3 0 0 2 0 1 2 0 1 3 0 4 1 0 4 2 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 3 1 0 2 bLabel1 0 1 3 2 bLabel2 0 0 0 1 0 3 1 0 1 1 4 0 4 3 0 2 1 2 1 3 4 1 4 2 5 0 0 5 0 1 5 0 3 5 0 2 5 4 3 Label name Index One dimensional array The number of elements is 4 Two dimensional array The number of elements is 5 4 Three dimensional array The number of elements is 6 5 4 Settin...

Страница 380: ...array definition Different initial values cannot be set for each element The same initial value is stored in all the array elements Number of array dimensions Format Remarks One dimension Array of primitive data type structure name array start value array end value For the primitive data type Page 374 Primitive data type For the structure name Page 381 Structures Definition example Bit 0 15 Two di...

Страница 381: ...ry and the data type is Bit 0 2 0 2 the operation of boolAry 0 0 is the same as that of boolAry When a multidimensional array is specified as setting data of instructions functions and function blocks that use arrays the rightmost element is regarded as a one dimensional array Type Specification example Remarks Constant bLabel1 0 An integer can be specified Device bLabel1 D0 A word device double w...

Страница 382: ...nstructions Standard Functions Function Blocks Array elements When accessing the element defined in an array access it within the range of the number of elements If a constant out of the range defined for the array index is specified a compile error will occur If the array index is specified with data other than a constant a compile error will not occur The processing will be performed by accessin...

Страница 383: ...between Ex Specifying a member in the structure When labels are registered by defining multiple data types in a structure and used in a program the order the data is stored after operation is not the order the data types were defined When programs are converted using the engineering tool labels are classified into type and data type and then assigned to the memory memory assignment by packing bloc...

Страница 384: ...ray Other structures Types of structures Each of the following labels is predefined as a structure Type Reference Module label Function Block Reference for the module used Timer type Page 374 Data Types Retentive timer type Counter type Long timer type Long retentive timer type Long counter type Member label 1 Member label 2 Member label 3 Member label 4 Structure label 1 Member label 1 Member lab...

Страница 385: ...ing as well Page 605 FUNCTIONS When using the Safety CPU refer to the following as well Page 535 FUNCTIONS RnCPU RnENCPU RnSFCPU RnSFCPU RnPSFCPU RnPSFCPU RnPCPU RnPCPU Standard Safety Standard Safety Redundant Process GOT Ethernet 1234Hz External devices such as a monitoring device and personal computer such as SLMP and MC protocol Communication using label names and program languages such as C l...

Страница 386: ...ten from an engineering tool Reading and deleting 1 are not possible 1 Deleting an entire folder is possible Global Label Setting window 1 Set the label in Global Label Setting and select the Access from External Device checkbox 2 Check the capacity of the label communication data Setting of File Data Use or Not in Memory Card windows 3 Enable Data for Label Communication to use the label communic...

Страница 387: ...to be used CPU Parameter Memory Device Setting Device Label Memory Area Setting 2 Create a program using the label The following is the program example for copying the data The data logging function uses the data in udLabel1 3 Use the device where the data has been transferred in step 2 for the function having restrictions on the use of labels In the program example in step 2 use D0 The number of ...

Страница 388: ... data range than the search range n points Restrictions on naming labels The following restrictions apply when naming labels Start the name with a character or underline _ Numbers cannot be used at the beginning of label names Reserved words cannot be used For details on the reserved words refer to the following GX Works3 Operating Manual SET bLabel 0 SFTP bLabel 1 SET wLabel1 0 SFTP wLabel1 1 To ...

Страница 389: ...rol The R00CPU R01CPU and R02CPU retain the data in each device label with latch setting without a battery during power failure The other programmable controller CPUs retain the data in each device label with latch setting without a battery during power failure by inserting a battery less option cassette to the CPU module Page 394 Latch with Battery less Option Cassette Types of latch The followin...

Страница 390: ... The labels below can be latched Device Specification method Applicable latch type Internal relay M Specify the latch range Latch 1 or Latch 2 Link relay B Specify the latch range Latch 1 or Latch 2 Annunciator F Specify the latch range Latch 1 or Latch 2 Edge relay V Specify the latch range Latch 1 or Latch 2 Timer T Long timer LT Retentive timer ST Long retentive timer LST Specify the latch rang...

Страница 391: ... to latch its range and the latch type Operating procedure Device Setting window 1 Click Detailed Setting on the Device Setting window CPU Parameter Memory Device Setting Device Label Memory Area Detailed Setting Device Setting Detailed Setting 2 In the Device Setting window select the type of latch for the target device The Latch Range Setting window is displayed Latch Range Setting window 3 Chec...

Страница 392: ...h Interval Setting Operating procedure Displayed items The Valid Range of Latch Interval Setting window 1 On the Valid Range Confirmation of Latch Interval Setting window check the effective range for the latch timing setting Specify the latch interval operation within the effective range Device Latch Interval Setting window 2 In Latch Interval Operation Setting select the timing of the latch proc...

Страница 393: ... file storage area and 168K words for the device area in Device Label Memory Area Capacity Setting 2 100K points is specified for the data register D on the Device Setting window and 3 D33151 and later are specified as the latch target devices In this configuration D33152 and later data registers D can be latched in real time as well as the devices W SW and L which are out of the effective range 1...

Страница 394: ...When set to Per Scan Latch processing is executed in the END processing of every scan This setting allows to always retain the device of the previous scan because the devices are latched at every scan However it may increase the scan time 0 0 100 300 200 200 400 300 10ms 10ms Time setting For 10ms Device memory Values from D0 to D99 Backup power area Values from D0 to D99 Program 1 scan Time elaps...

Страница 395: ...ilure if this battery runs out Use the battery less option cassette for retaining the data without a battery during power failure Page 394 Latch with Battery less Option Cassette If the latch range and number of device points are modified by using parameters latch is performed on the modified latch range However if the value of the parameter setting the latch range is different between the previou...

Страница 396: ...is on Insertion of the battery less option cassette can be checked from the following items in the engineering tool Product Information List in System Monitor Module Information List in Module Diagnostics 6 Set Mounted for Battery less Option Cassette Setting in CPU Parameter with the engineering tool CPU Parameter Memory Device Setting Device Label Memory Area Setting Cassette Setting Battery les...

Страница 397: ... memory from the CPU module and save it in advance using the engineering tool in advance When the battery less option cassette is removed all of the data on the device label memory are erased 2 Power off the programmable controller 3 Remove the CPU module from the base unit 4 Remove the battery less option cassette from the CPU module 5 Install a battery to the CPU module 6 Mount the CPU module on...

Страница 398: ...nded to set Time Setting SNTP Client in the module parameter MELSEC iQ R Ethernet User s Manual Application The scan time during the execution of the latch with a battery less option cassette is longer than the scan time of when the latch with a battery less option cassette is not executed As for the instructions specifying the data retained during power failure such as the file register for the a...

Страница 399: ...ollowing as well Page 322 LABEL INITIALIZATION FUNCTION When using a SIL2 Process CPU refer to the following as well Page 605 FUNCTIONS When using a Safety CPU refer to the following as well Page 535 FUNCTIONS 1 If initial device values are used a program to set data to the devices becomes unnecessary RnCPU RnENCPU RnSFCPU RnSFCPU RnPSFCPU RnPSFCPU RnPCPU RnPCPU Standard Safety Standard Safety Red...

Страница 400: ... initial device value file and the CPU parameters to the CPU module GX Works3 Operating Manual 6 The data in the specified initial device value file is automatically set to the specified device or buffer memory of the intelligent function module when the CPU module is powered off and on reset or the status changes from STOP to RUN Initial value setting Configure the initial value setting CPU Param...

Страница 401: ... label value file are written to the CPU module GX Works3 Operating Manual 4 The data in the specified initial global label value file and initial local label value file is automatically set to the specified label when the CPU module is powered off and on reset or the status changes from STOP to RUN Target device Applicable range Global device Initial device values set up in the initial value file...

Страница 402: ...l value cannot be used for areas that are not desirable to be set when the CPU module status changes from STOP to RUN because they should be set when the power is turned off and on and changed by the program By using the MOV instruction for example create a program to set an initial value to the specified device or label In addition if it is a module access device make sure to write the initial va...

Страница 403: ...mal constant using H character e g H1234 To specify data in BCD specify each digit of hexadecimal value with numerical characters 0 to 9 The specification range depends on the argument data type of the instruction using the hexadecimal constant The range is H0 to HFFFF for 16 bit data size and H0 to HFFFFFFFF for 32 bit data size Argument data type of the instruction Specification range for decima...

Страница 404: ...ata input by the engineering tool refer to the following MELSEC iQ R Programming Manual CPU Module Instructions Standard Functions Function Blocks Processing when operation is in progress This section describes the processing when operation is in progress When overflow and or underflow occurs If an overflow and or underflow occurs when the operation is in progress the following process is performe...

Страница 405: ... number 8 0 8 337 8 1_1 Decimal Directly enter a signed or unsigned decimal number 123 123 123 12_3 Add K before a signed or unsigned decimal number K123 K 123 Hexadecimal Add 16 before a hexadecimal number 16 FF 16 1_1 Add H before a hexadecimal number HFF HEAD Real number Decimal notation Directly enter a signed or unsigned real decimal number with a decimal point 2 34 2 34 2 34 3 14_15 Single p...

Страница 406: ...me can be omitted sequentially from the beginning to the end or in reverse order T 31m23s T 31m0s648ms A sign can be added only before the first unit of time T 31m23s An unsigned real decimal number with a decimal point can be used for the last unit of time The values after the decimal point of ms millisecond are rounded down T 24d20h31m23s648 123 ms The time is treated as T 24d20h31m23s648 ms T 1...

Страница 407: ...ng the redundant system using the Process CPU redundant mode Since information same as that of the Process CPU process mode is not described in these chapters refer to Part 1 to Part 3 26 BASIC CONCEPT 27 PROCEDURE FOR STARTING UP A REDUNDANT SYSTEM 28 FUNCTIONS 29 PRECAUTIONS ON PROGRAMMING 30 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION FOR A REDUNDANT SYSTEM ...

Страница 408: ...ol with the software version corresponding to the firmware version of the Process CPU Page 1008 Added and Enhanced Functions 26 1 System System A and system B In a redundant system one system is specified as a system A and the other is specified as a system B to distinguish between two systems connected with tracking cables Set the system A or B with the engineering tool Page 431 System A B Settin...

Страница 409: ... 475 System Consistency Check 26 4 Operation Mode of the Process CPU A Process CPU operates in one of the following two modes Process mode Use this mode when a redundant system is not built When Mode has been set to Process at project creation with the engineering tool the Process CPU is started up in the process mode Redundant mode Use this mode when a redundant system is built When Mode has been...

Страница 410: ...operations can be performed Automatic memory copy Memory copy with the engineering tool Memory copy with the special relay and special register The following copy operations can be performed Memory copy with the engineering tool Memory copy with the special relay and special register System consistency check The system consistency check is performed The system consistency check is not performed Pr...

Страница 411: ...am operation is not performed with the default setting Programs are executed according to Both Systems Program Executions Setting in Program Setting of CPU Parameter Page 479 Program Execution in Both Systems 3 This processing will not be performed when the operation mode is changed from the backup mode to the separate mode Processing Backup mode Separate mode Control system Standby system Control...

Страница 412: ...dant function module to check the status of the control system standby system Users can check the status of the control system standby system with the engineering tool GX Works3 Operating Manual System monitor Monitor status bar Precautions If the system A B settings have not been set for both systems or the same system setting has been set for both systems If the system A B settings have not been...

Страница 413: ...he SD memory card on the other system are not completed in the timeout period set in Other system Start up Timeout Setting a stop error occurs on the own system If diagnostics of the SD memory card takes time on the other system a stop error occurs on the other system as well In this case a stop error occurs on both systems and the systems cannot be started as a redundant system Reset and restore ...

Страница 414: ...Start up Timeout Setting of CPU Parameter to Not Set Precautions To start up the system that is waiting for the start up of the other system as the control system check that the other system is not operating as the control system When tracking communications are established by connecting the other system with a tracking cable or powering on or resetting the CPU module in the other system the CPU m...

Страница 415: ...ink IE Field Network When using this program example do not power off and on or reset the CPU module on each system in separate mode Change the mode to the backup mode before powering off and on or resetting the CPU module System configuration The following figure shows a configuration example of the system Wiring example The following figure shows a wiring example TD is an on delay timer wired ex...

Страница 416: ...horter than the above a stop error may occur on one system even though tracking cables are connected properly because turning on X20 Control System Start up Setting Input X starts this program example Parameter settings The following shows parameter settings System parameter Set the system parameter according to the system configuration in I O Assignment Setting CPU parameter program settings Set ...

Страница 417: ...ng Control System Start up Setting Input X set a switch for the input to X20 so that Control System Start up Setting Input X is enabled only when the switch is on 1 Set Not Set in Other system Start up Timeout Setting 2 Set Enable in Control System Start up Setting Input X 3 Set X20 in Input X 4 Set Detailed setting in Tracking Device Label Setting 5 Do not include X20 to X2F and Y30 to Y3F which ...

Страница 418: ...tandby time setting 11 Set the standby time For the system A SM1632 set the standby time longer Standby processing 17 to 25 If the control system is started up with the on delay timer X20 the system stands by temporarily If both systems start up successfully the system does not stand by Condition judgment of the other system 32 When the other system is operating and the own system is the system B ...

Страница 419: ...ror does not occur because an initial execution type program is not executed on the other system If a stop error has occurred in this program the possible cause is a tracking cables failure Check the connection of tracking cables and power off and on or reset the CPU module on the system in which the stop error has occurred ...

Страница 420: ... A is started up as the control system when both systems are powered on again To start up the system B that was the previous control system as the control system again create a program that uses SM1636 Previous control system identification flag For a system where a network module has been mounted execute the SP CONTSW instruction after a network module on the other system is started up Program ex...

Страница 421: ...one scan after the CPU module in the system A is set to the RUN state 3 The system switching is performed by the SP CONTSW instruction 4 The system B is switched from a standby system to a control system System A Standby system Power off System B Control system Power off GOEND SP CONTSW D0 M0 SM1636 GOEND SP CONTSW D0 M0 SM1636 System A Power on Control system System B Power on Standby system Syst...

Страница 422: ...ol system System B Standby system System A Standby system System B Off System A Off System B Standby system System A Off System B Off Backup mode System A Off System B Control system System A Control system System B Standby system System A Standby system System B Control system Power off the system A System switching Operation mode change Operation mode change System A Control system System B Off ...

Страница 423: ...26 BASIC CONCEPT 26 8 State Transition of the Redundant System 421 26 MEMO ...

Страница 424: ...ons The CPU module is in the STOP state Check that the following LEDs turn on after the system is powered on Power supply module POWER LED CPU module READY LED Redundant function module RUN LED In step 4 the ERROR LED of each CPU module flashes and the ERR LED of each redundant function module turns on Proceed to the next step 5 Connecting a personal computer and a CPU module Start an engineering ...

Страница 425: ...es 12 Checking the LEDs Check that the LEDs of each CPU module and redundant function module are in the following states The CARD READY LED status depends on whether an SD memory card has been installed to each CPU module or not When an error has occurred the following LEDs are on Check details of the error with the engineering tool and eliminate the error cause CPU module ERROR LED MELSEC iQ R CP...

Страница 426: ...iring to the power supply module is correct The power supply voltage is within the range of specifications The CPU module is in the STOP state Check that the following LEDs turn on after the system is powered on Power supply module POWER LED CPU module READY LED Redundant function module RUN LED In step 4 the ERROR LED of the CPU module flashes and the ERR LED of the redundant function module turn...

Страница 427: ... Page 485 Redundant System Operation Setting Switch operation Set the RUN STOP RESET switch of the CPU module to the RUN STOP and then the RUN position again Input X operation Turn on the input X set with the parameters 13 Checking the LEDs Check that the LEDs of the CPU module and redundant function module are in the following states The following figure shows the LED status when own system is se...

Страница 428: ...m with the engineering tool by following the procedure described below Page 468 Memory Copy from Control System to Standby System Online Redundant PLC Operation Redundant Operation Select Memory Copy and click the Execute button When copying the memory is completed the MEMORY COPY LED of the redundant function module of the standby system turns on After that reset the CPU module of the standby sys...

Страница 429: ...the new control system increases considerably Therefore a WDT error may occur in the new control system and both systems may stop To avoid the above problem check the following at system start up After the redundant system is started the control system does not fail in data logging collection processing overflow 1 The new control system does not fail in data logging collection processing overflow ...

Страница 430: ...T connector of the system A and the IN connector of the system B 2 Pull each cable lightly and check that it has been connected securely Disconnection procedure 1 Disconnect the tracking cables while pressing the connector hook Precautions There are restrictions on the cable bending radius For details refer to the specifications of the tracking cables used Place the cables in a duct or clamp them ...

Страница 431: ...t modules at the shortest distance Also use the thickest wire maximum 2 to reduce the voltage drop For the wiring to a terminal block use a solderless terminal To prevent the short circuit because of loosening screws use the solderless terminal with an insulation sleeve of 0 8mm or less Note that up to two solderless terminals can be connected per terminal block Ground the LG and FG terminals afte...

Страница 432: ...ed for Type Select Redundant for Mode Select a programming language to be used for Programming Language and click the OK button 1 Connect a CPU module to the personal computer with a USB cable or an Ethernet cable The CPU module connected with a USB cable or an Ethernet cable becomes own system 2 Select Online Current Connection Destination from the menu of the engineering tool 3 Click the CPU Mod...

Страница 433: ...ill be overwritten automatically In that case the system setting change can be checked in the event history Event code 00700 If a system that has no system A B setting yet is connected to the system specified as system A the system that has no system A B setting will be automatically set to system B This event is not recorded in the event history If a system specified as system A is connected to a...

Страница 434: ...ation cannot be deleted Only changing the set system A B information is supported When starting up both systems if both systems have no system A B setting yet or the same system A B setting a stop error will occur when tracking communications are established Set a different system A B setting for each system If the system that has no system A B setting yet is started first a stop error will occur ...

Страница 435: ... system parameters CPU parameters and program files To operate I O modules and intelligent function modules write module parameters or module extension parameters When new parameters have been set or the set parameters have been changed reset the CPU module MELSEC iQ R CPU Module User s Manual Startup Use the Select Favorites button to register frequently used items such as system parameters CPU p...

Страница 436: ...th the engineering tool and check the operating status of the system A or B Online Current Connection Destination For how to check the operation refer to the following GX Works3 Operating Manual 1 Select a system in Specify Redundant CPU on the Specify Connection Destination Connection window 2 Click the Connection Test button to check whether the CPU module of the selected system has been connect...

Страница 437: ... to the standby system and maintains the consistency of the data in the two systems to continue operation of the redundant system when a failure or an error occurs in the control system Page 454 Tracking Transfer Memory copy from control system to standby system Transfers data such as parameters and programs in the CPU module of the control system to the CPU module of the standby system to maintai...

Страница 438: ...the global label setting file online Page 1008 Added and Enhanced Functions RAS function Scan monitoring function During system switching scan time monitoring with the watchdog timer is interrupted Thus no error is detected even if the scan time monitoring time has elapsed Therefore a time taken for system switching does not need to be considered in the scan time monitoring time setting Scan time ...

Страница 439: ...e used in redundant mode Security function The security key setting is written or deleted on both systems individually regardless of the operation mode Latch function When the systems are switched the new control system and the new standby system start the value in Interval Setting at Time Setting in Device Latch Interval Setting from 0 Label access setting from external device In the transfer set...

Страница 440: ... 6 The CPU module is set to the RUN state and executes a program and the PROGRAM RUN LED turns on For the step 5 the following methods are also available for setting the CPU module to the RUN state Setting the RUN STOP RESET switch in the STOP position to the RUN position Setting the module in the STOP state to the RUN state by using the RUN PAUSE contact Powering off and on or resetting the CPU m...

Страница 441: ...in Change the Operation and click the Execute button The BACKUP LED of the redundant function module turns on 5 When the tracking trigger has been turned off at the mode switching to the separate mode turn on the tracking trigger Page 459 Tracking trigger Even when the CPU modules of both systems are simultaneously turned off and on or reset the systems start up in the backup mode at the next star...

Страница 442: ...dby system CPU module takes time to switch to the RUN state due to causes such as access to a file in the standby system CPU module the operating status of each of both systems becomes different and a continuation error occurs Switching the mode during initial initial processing when switched to RUN When the operation mode is switched during initial processing or initial processing when switched t...

Страница 443: ... are switched according to the cause with higher priority The switching cause determined according to the priority is stored in the event history and SD1643 System switching cause The manual system switching is requested for the control system CPU module The systems are not switched even when the CPU module is set to the STOP state They are switched when any of the above switching causes is genera...

Страница 444: ...ld Network module the systems can be switched even when a redundant function module is removed from the base unit or a failure has occurred in the base unit Stop error of the CPU module When a stop error occurs on the control system CPU module the standby system is notified of a system switching due to the stop error and the standby system CPU module is switched to the control system CPU module Th...

Страница 445: ... network module The following network modules send a system switching request CC Link IE Controller Network module CC Link IE Field Network module Ethernet interface module with built in CC Link IE If a network module cable is disconnected the systems may not be switched depending on the timing of error detection on the control system and the timing on the standby system Page 453 When the cable fo...

Страница 446: ...he devices and labels specified in Tracking Setting are transferred the CPU modules in both of the control system and standby system have the same specified devices and labels Thus if the systems are switched by using the SP CONTSW instruction on the control system CPU module switching may also be performed on the new control system CPU module When the SP CONTSW instruction is used create a progra...

Страница 447: ...e END processing Switch the systems from the Redundant Operation window of the engineering tool Online Redundant PLC Operation Redundant Operation Ex Operation of system switching from the engineering tool END Program executed System switching request from an engineering tool System A System B System switching Standby system Program stopped Program executed Control system Control system Program st...

Страница 448: ...stem does not receive the tracking data Online change Write operation at system switching continues Device label memory The state before system switching is held Signal flow memory Page 461 Tracking transfer setting for the signal flow memory In backup mode the signal flow of the old control system is reflected 2 In separate mode the signal flow of the old standby system is reflected The state bef...

Страница 449: ...ms are switched during an online change a mismatch between the files is detected in the system consistency check and a stop error may occur on the new standby system Page 477 File 6 Although the control system CPU module is switched to the standby system CPU module the existing standby system is not switched Redundant system status Execution availability of system switching Automatic system switch...

Страница 450: ...e SEPARATE LED flashes in separate mode The cause to flash the BACKUP LED or SEPARATE LED can be checked in SD1642 BACKUP SEPARATE LED flashing cause Check SD1642 and eliminate the cause to flash the LED Redundant system status Execution availability of system switching Automatic system switching Manual system switching Power off reset hardware failure of the CPU module Stop error of the CPU modul...

Страница 451: ... is stored in SD1649 of the control system and standby system If the systems have not been switched even after a switching cause is generated the cause why the systems have not been switched can be checked by checking SD1644 Cause of system switching failure The switching cause is stored in SD1643 System switching cause of the control system For the values stored in the special relay and special r...

Страница 452: ... the redundant function module SD number Name Storage status at system switching New control system CPU module New standby system CPU module SD1642 BACKUP SEPARATE LED flashing cause SD1643 System switching cause SD1644 Cause of the system switching failure 1 SD1645 System switching request status from a network module of own system SD1646 System switching request status from a network module of t...

Страница 453: ... taken for system switching does not need to be considered in the scan time monitoring time WDT setting System switching disabled by online change In a redundant system the manual system switching is disabled during an online change Page 452 System switching disabled by online change Operation of an event execution type program When ON of bit data TRUE has been specified in the trigger type and th...

Страница 454: ...system so that the other system will operate as the control system If a WDT error or a hardware failure of the CPU module has occurred in the control system while a stop error exists in the standby system the control system is switched to the standby system and the both systems operate as standby systems In this case eliminate error causes and then power off and on or reset the CPU modules in the ...

Страница 455: ...ated during initial processing or initial processing when switched to RUN on the standby system whether the systems are switched or not depends on the system switching cause 1 When the control system detects cable disconnection first the systems are switched 2 When the standby system detects cable disconnection first the systems are not switched At this time a continuation error occurs on the cont...

Страница 456: ...assigned for each tracking block Up to 1M word device label data can be transferred in one scan During an online change or when a stop error has occurred tracking transfer is performed only for system data Page 457 System data In the CPU parameter Tracking Device Label Setting is set to Transfer collectively by default Thus tracking transfer is performed without setting the parameter Page 461 Batc...

Страница 457: ...ls with devices assigned are not transferred as global labels They are transferred according to the tracking transfer settings of the assigned devices Item Operation mode Reference Backup mode Separate mode Device data User device Page 456 Devices that can be specified Special relay 1 Page 457 Special relay Special register 1 Page 457 Special register Global label 3 4 Page 462 Detailed setting Loc...

Страница 458: ... Local device User device Input X Output Y Internal relay M Link relay B Annunciator F Link special relay SB Edge relay V Step relay S Timer T Retentive timer ST Long timer LT Long retentive timer LST Counter C Long counter LC Data register D Link register W Link special register SW Latch relay L System device Function input FX Function output FY Function register FD Special relay SM 1 Special reg...

Страница 459: ...operation mode change is transferred SM number Name SM752 Dedicated instruction End bit control flag SM754 BIN DBIN instruction error control flag SM755 Scaling data check settings SM756 Module access completion wait control flag SM775 Selection of link refresh processing during the COM instruction execution SM776 Local device setting at CALL SM777 Local device setting in interrupt programs SM792 ...

Страница 460: ...sfer local devices global labels local labels Up to 64 blocks No 1 to 64 are available Up to 2048 devices can be set in a block Up to 2048 devices can be transferred in a single tracking The available capacity of tracking devices or labels is 1M words per block Ex When only the tracking block No 3 has no setting Global labels local labels and local devices are transferred only once in one scan Eve...

Страница 461: ...1667 is automatically turned on by the system at initial processing or operating status change from STOP to RUN and the tracking transfer is started Ex Program example for changing the status of tracking transfer triggers according to conditions Setting procedure for tracking transfer The following describes the setting procedure for tracking transfer 1 Set Tracking Setting in the CPU parameter Pa...

Страница 462: ...ing Reflection button in the Global Device Setting window Page 463 Global device setting Item Description Setting range Default Signal Flow Memory Tracking Setting Set whether to transfer the signal flow memory or not Page 461 Tracking transfer setting for the signal flow memory Do Not Transfer Transfer Transfer Tracking Device Label Setting Set Transfer collectively or Detailed setting for device...

Страница 463: ...ically transferring all the devices and labels in a batch or transferring specified devices and labels of a specified tracking block Batch transfer When Tracking Device Label Setting is set to Transfer collectively the following devices and labels are assigned to the tracking block No 1 and automatically transferred 1 The data used in both systems execution programs is not transferred 2 Global lab...

Страница 464: ...d devices When setting devices and labels for tracking transfer click the Size Calculation button to check if the tracking data capacity in one scan is equal to or less than 1M words Item Item Description Setting range Default Device Detailed Setting Global Device Setting Set global devices to be transferred Page 463 Global device setting 0 0K Word Local Device Setting Set whether to transfer loca...

Страница 465: ...ion button Item Description Device Setting Reflection Reflects the device setting of Device Label Memory Area Setting in the CPU parameter Except for the annunciator F link special relay SB and link special register SW Tracking Block No Select the number of a tracking block to be set File Register Setting Enter a file name of the file register file This item is valid only when the file register ZR...

Страница 466: ...is detected Item Description Synchronous tracking mode Tracking data is always transferred to the standby system once every scan of the control system During a tracking transfer from the control system to the standby system the next scan does not start in the control system Asynchronous tracking mode When a tracking transfer from the control system is to be performed and the previous tracking is s...

Страница 467: ... system sends the tracking data 3 Sending tracking data The control system sends the tracking data 4 Waiting for completion of tracking data reception The control system waits for a notification of receive completion from the standby system After receiving the notification of the receive completion from the standby system the control system starts another END processing Item Description 5 Tracking...

Страница 468: ...Description 1 Tracking send processing 2 Waiting for completion of tracking data reflection After receiving a notification of the reflection completion from the standby system the control system sends the tracking data When a notification of reflection completion is not arrived 4 the control system does not send tracking data in the scan 3 Sending tracking data The control system sends the trackin...

Страница 469: ...bal devices local devices global labels and local labels are not transferred in the scan In this case check which tracking trigger turned on in the event history of the engineering tool and set the tracking data capacity within 1M words Even though the size of the tracking data to be transferred is 1M words or less the size of the data may become larger than 1M words depending on the label type or...

Страница 470: ... of the memory in the two CPU modules Ex Replacement of the standby system CPU module using the memory copy The following memories are available for the memory copy Program memory Device label memory copying only the file area of file register Data memory copying only the files in the system folder MELPRJ SD memory card copying only the files in the system folder MELPRJ The memory copy is executed...

Страница 471: ... CPU module program files and their security keys are copied but the security key of the CPU module is not copied Starting up the CPU module without re writing of the security key causes an error of the CPU module because the security keys do not match between those program files and the CPU module If the security key of the CPU module is written in an extended SRAM cassette the replaced CPU modul...

Страница 472: ...t been configured for the standby system CPU module the automatic memory copy is executed when the parameter setting has been configured for the control system CPU module Parameter To execute the automatic memory copy set Auto Memory Copy Setting to Enable in the CPU parameter CPU Parameter Redundant System Settings Redundant Behavior Setting Window Displayed items Item Description Application Aut...

Страница 473: ...t function modules in both systems flash at 200ms intervals 3 The standby system CPU module is automatically reset and restarted and the memory copy is completed The MEMORY COPY LEDs of both systems turn off Memory copy with the engineering tool The following describes the execution procedure of memory copy using the engineering tool Execution procedure 1 Connect the engineering tool to the contro...

Страница 474: ...mory copy being executed and SM1655 Memory copy completion are off When SM1654 is on the memory copy is being executed Another memory copy cannot be started until the memory copy is completed When SM1655 is on the memory copy with the special relay and special register cannot be started Execute the memory copy again after turning off SM1655 2 Store 03D1H Standby system CPU module in SD1653 Memory ...

Страница 475: ...register in memory copy 1 The memory copy is started 2 The memory copy is completed 3 When the memory copy is successfully completed 0 is stored When it is completed with an error an error code is stored 1 2 3 0 0 0 0 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 03D1H SM1653 SM1654 SM1655 SD1653 SD1654 Memory copy start Memory copy being executed Memory copy completion Memory copy status Memory copy destination I O numbe...

Страница 476: ...Different models of CPU module are used in the control system and standby system Online operation from the engineering tool The systems are being switched An online module change is being performed for replacing a redundant function module or modules of the standby system In separate mode for the automatic memory copy The memory copy has been executed on the standby system The memory copy is being...

Страница 477: ...s to be checked in the system consistency check No Item Description Reference 1 File Parameter file program file and other files Page 477 File 2 Operating status Operating status of CPU module RUN STOP PAUSE Page 478 Operating status 3 Mounting status of main base unit CPU module and other modules mounted on the main base unit Page 478 Mounting status of main base unit 4 SD memory card Installing ...

Страница 478: ...is switched to the backup mode When the operating status of the CPU module is switched from STOP to RUN At END processing At online change completion At system switching When a tracking cable is reconnected Operating status 1 When the standby system is turned on or reset while the control system is operating When the operation mode is switched to the backup mode When the operating status of the CP...

Страница 479: ...d a stop error occurs on the standby system CPU module Set the CPU modules of both systems to have the same files with either of the following methods Writing files to both systems Executing the memory copy from the control system to the standby system for storing the same files in both systems Page 468 Memory Copy from Control System to Standby System File type Check target memory Built in memory...

Страница 480: ...els and types of modules mounted on each slot Operation of when a mismatch is detected If a mismatch between the mounting statuses of the main base units is detected a stop error occurs on the standby system CPU module If a mismatch between the mounting statuses of the main base units is detected when the CPU modules of both systems are simultaneously turned on or reset a stop error occurs on the ...

Страница 481: ...tems This function detects an error in the external device or network of the systems control system and standby system by executing a program that diagnoses external devices or networks of both systems The program set in Both Systems Program Executions Setting is executed on the CPU modules of both systems Ex When an error in the external device of the standby system is notified through a continua...

Страница 482: ...parameter Page 485 Redundant System Operation Setting Item Description Setting range Default Both Systems Program Executions Setting Set whether to execute a program only on the control system CPU module or on the CPU modules of both systems Both Systems Executions can be set for programs whose execution type is the initial execution type scan execution type or standby type program Only Control Sy...

Страница 483: ...ce label values to be used can be initialized by using SM1643 ON for only one scan after system switching standby system to control system and SM1644 ON for only one scan after system switching control system to standby system For 1 and 2 in the following example use the SET instruction or others to prevent duplication of a coil in the processing 1 Initialization processing standby system control ...

Страница 484: ...completion on the old control system Scan execution type program This type of program is executed from the step 0 Direct access input DX In the program execution after system switching data is fetched when an instruction using the direct access input DX is executed Direct access output DY Data is not output However data is output when Standby System Output Setting of the CPU parameter is enabled a...

Страница 485: ...the new control system CPU module The old standby system is switched to the new control system after the initial execution type program has been completed and then the initial execution type program is executed again Interrupt disabled or enabled state The control system and standby system have individual interrupt disabled or enabled state because the states are not transferred Tracking transfer ...

Страница 486: ... instruction or SCJ instruction in a program which is not set as a both systems execution program is called in the standby system Calling a subroutine program and turning the output off FCALL P Calling a subroutine program in the specified program file ECALL P Calling a subroutine program in the specified program file and turning the output off EFCALL P Calling a subroutine program with output off...

Страница 487: ...be tracked If such an operation is performed the outputs Y are overwritten with the control system data and output from the standby system Even though the standby system CPU module is in the STOP state the output Y received in tracking transfer is output Disable Enable Disable Backup Mode Setting Page 478 Operating status Auto Memory Copy Setting Page 470 Automatic memory copy Control Standby Syst...

Страница 488: ...gram Execution in Both Systems Operation at system switching The operation performed at standby system differs when Standby System Output Setting is set to Enable The following table shows the operation performed when Standby System Output Setting has been set to Enable For the program execution in both systems refer to the following Page 479 Program Execution in Both Systems Item New control syst...

Страница 489: ...t the control system and standby system with the tracking cable Page 428 Wiring the redundant function modules 8 Click the Close button in the Redundant Operation window to exit the module communication test 9 Set the CPU module operating status to the RUN state The module communication test can be executed regardless of whether the backup mode or separate mode is selected as the operation mode In...

Страница 490: ... due to tracking transfer When a failure has occurred and a continuation error occurs due to the excess of constant scan time clear the error Page 133 Error Clear System switching in separate mode When the systems are switched in separate mode the scam time of the control system will increase by the increase of the standby system scam time When the constant scan has been set a continuation error m...

Страница 491: ...matched the online change has not been completed successfully Connect the engineering tool to the control system CPU module execute an online change only to the control system and proceed to step 3 When the verification result is matched but the program memory transfer window was not displayed at the online change the possible cause is that data transfer to the program memory has not been complete...

Страница 492: ...rs have occurred all the errors are cleared at once Precautions Error clear operation with SM1679 can be performed by the control system CPU only A continuation error on the standby system CPU module cannot be cleared by turning off and on SM1679 of the standby system CPU module Error clear operation with SM1679 can be performed in backup mode only The cause of an error which has occurred in a mod...

Страница 493: ...Execution Target the remote operation is performed on the CPU modules of both systems Specify Both Systems Online Remote Operation When Specify Redundant CPU is set to Not Specified in the transfer setup select All Stations Specified or Specified Group to perform a remote operation on the CPU modules of both systems In separate mode The CPU module operating status of a system specified in the tran...

Страница 494: ...by system through another path the standby system CPU module cannot be reset by performing a remote RESET operation on the control system CPU module To perform a remote RESET operation on the CPU module of the control system or standby system use the path that was used to perform the remote operation on the standby system CPU module Cancel the remote operation first and perform the remote RESET op...

Страница 495: ...tem If only one system is restarted with the boot operation a system consistency check error may occur The following operations are recommended Remove the SD memory cards for boot operation after simultaneously starting up both systems When using an SD memory card for other applications such as the data logging function prepare another one Online change in boot operation It is recommended to remov...

Страница 496: ...ns are performed for the control system However registration status update can be performed for both systems There is no difference between operation modes Operation possible Operation not possible Register forced on off for the control system Forced on off registration information of the control system is transferred to the standby system Forced on off is reflected to the input output devices of ...

Страница 497: ... the input devices specified in the tracking transfer setting Forced on off of output devices Forced on off is reflected to output devices when the END processing is executed The following table lists the behavior of the output devices within the refresh range or the output devices specified in the tracking transfer setting Operation mode Standby system output setting Reflection to output devices ...

Страница 498: ...OM instruction execution at input refresh At instruction execution using the direct access input DX LD LDI AND ANI OR ORI LDP LDF ANDP ANDF ORP ORF LDPI LDFI ANDPI ANDFI ORPI ORFI At RFS instruction execution At execution of instructions used in the interrupt by the system UDCNT2 At program execution 1 At reflection of the tracking receive data to devices END processing at output refresh At COM in...

Страница 499: ...nformation in the first scan is required start the standby system in the STOP state and switch it to the RUN state after checking that the forced on off registration information of the control system is reflected to the standby system When the standby system is powered on while the control system is operating forced on off registration information may not be reflected in the first scan if the stan...

Страница 500: ...dby system CPU module is waiting for the transition to the RUN state Waiting Start Not Collected Data collection has not yet been started and the CPU module is waiting for the start operation Pause Data logging is suspended and data collection has not yet been started Waiting to establish collection conditions Not collected Waiting for the first collection timing after the start operation Collecti...

Страница 501: ...following table shows the LED status in the data logging states of the standby system Data collection conditions When time specification has been set as a data collection condition and the systems are switched during data logging time measurement starts from 0 in the new control system and data is not collected at the specified interval Trigger logging If the systems are switched while trigger log...

Страница 502: ...ta logging setting When the data logging setting is written please note the following While the data logging setting is being written do not perform the following operations on both of the control system and standby system In the following cases the setting is written only to own system Auto logging function The auto logging function cannot be used in the standby system Even though an SD memory ca...

Страница 503: ... selected in the transfer setup and the systems are switched a target system mismatch is detected by a command issued during the system switching and a communication error occurs If a communication error occurs while a data write command is being issued the data write command needs to be issued for the new control system Remote operation If a remote operation command is executed the CPU modules en...

Страница 504: ...truction symbol Special counter instructions Counting up or down the current value 1 phase input UDCNT1 Counting up or down the current value 2 phase input UDCNT2 Special timer instructions Teaching timer TTMR Special function timer STMR Shortcut control instruction Rotary table shortest direction control ROTC Ramp signal instruction Ramp signal RAMPQ Pulse related instructions Measuring the densi...

Страница 505: ... tracking device When the system switching is performed during execution of an instruction execute the instruction again as required For some instructions an error will occur if an instruction is executed during execution of the same instruction For the operation for each instruction that is executed again during execution of the same instruction refer to the following MELSEC iQ R Programming Manu...

Страница 506: ...r system switching standby to control will turn on for one scan in the new control system and the REMFR instruction will be executed again on the station number 10 of the network number 1 DEVICES 1 For details on the link special relays SB and link special registers SW refer to the manuals for the network used 2 Change the device number according to the system Program example DEVICES Data stored S...

Страница 507: ...ntrol system to read the X signals and buffer memory status of the target module and to determine whether or not to execute the instruction again DEVICES 1 For details on the link special relays SB and link special registers SW refer to the manuals for the network used 2 Change the device number according to the system Program example DEVICES Data stored SM1643 System switching check flag standby ...

Страница 508: ...ose execution condition turned off before the system switching will be executed SCJ instruction When the signal flow memory is not tracked Once the system switching is performed the execution condition of the SCJ instruction turns on after the signal flow memory of the new control system turns on In the new control system processing jumps to the pointer specified by the SCJ instruction in the firs...

Страница 509: ...d with the status at the previous measurement XCALL instruction If the system switching is performed without the signal flow memory being tracked the signal flow memory of the new control system turns on Thus the subroutine program will not be executed when the execution condition of the XCALL instruction remains off in the first scan after system switching Rising instruction using SM1643 as an ex...

Страница 510: ...dby system after system switching n Total number of loops Ex When the number of loops is eight the PIDINITP instruction needs 2 8 10 82 words and the PIDCONTP instruction needs 10 8 18 154 words Thus include D1000 to D1081 and D1100 to D1253 in tracking target data Classification Instruction symbol Program execution control instructions Disabling interrupt programs DI Enabling interrupt programs E...

Страница 511: ... output to the network module is changed by the COM or ZCOM instruction with the CPU module in the control system the change will not be reflected to the CPU module in the standby system After the system switching the CPU module in the new control system outputs old values to the network module and output from the network module may vary 2 This processing is not selectable because no intelligent f...

Страница 512: ...m When the old standby system has retained multiple interrupt factors the scan time may greatly increase System switching in separate mode When the old control system is switched to the new standby system The old control system executes the interrupt factors that the old control system has retained even after the system is switched to the new standby system by system switching before execution of ...

Страница 513: ...ET F instruction can be registered in the new control system The SET F instruction registers the annunciator at the rising edge of the execution condition To register the annunciator in the new control system at system switching add a normally closed contact of SM1643 ON for only one scan after system switching standby system to control system as the AND condition in the execution conditions of th...

Страница 514: ...into the state in which no timeout has occurred in the first scan after system switching When values are output writing values to the buffer memory and the output Y with a timer contact or an output variable the timer statues may go into the state in which no timeout has occurred as described above causing chattering of the output To transfer data with modules or external devices using the output ...

Страница 515: ...ystem switching For command output such as output Y startup by writing data to the buffer memory and clear to the intelligent function module and external devices consider the time taken for tracking the execution condition of command output from the CPU module in the control system to the CPU module in the standby system The following example shows a program that outputs data one scan later after...

Страница 516: ... on M0 turns on the output Y10 and turning on M10 turns off the output Y10 In the CPU parameter select Transfer default setting in Signal Flow Memory Tracking Setting of Redundant System Settings Page 461 Tracking transfer setting for the signal flow memory Without measures With measures 2 PLS M1 delays SET Y10 by one scan 9 PLS M11 delays RST Y10 by one scan External input X10 Output Y10 ...

Страница 517: ...rom the step 0 in the new control system after system switching Therefore values may be output twice before and after system switching Output results may differ between the two outputs Link direct device Jn Y Direct access output DY Refresh at execution of a specified program Refresh Group Setting of Program Setting Before outputting values with one of the above devices or setting check that the a...

Страница 518: ...on the CPU module and the control system and the standby system continue operating without being switched Perform online module change if the redundant function module has failed MELSEC iQ R Online Module Change Manual 4 Use the online module change function MELSEC iQ R Online Module Change Manual Since the standby system needs to be powered off for replacing their modules a continuation error occ...

Страница 519: ...lacement target CPU module 3 Power off the standby system Power off the standby system When the standby system is powered off the BACKUP LED of the redundant function module in the control system flashes 4 Replace the CPU module in the standby system Replace the CPU module in the standby system with a new CPU module whose model is the same as that of the CPU module in the control system If an SD m...

Страница 520: ...dule whose model is the same as that of the CPU module in the control system If an SD memory card or an extended SRAM cassette has been inserted to the replacement target CPU module insert it to the new CPU module 4 Change the switch status of the CPU module in the standby system Set the RUN STOP RESET switch of the CPU module in the standby system to the RUN position 5 Power on the standby system...

Страница 521: ...tart up of the other system 3 Replace the power supply module in the standby system Replace the power supply module in the standby system 4 Power on the standby system Check if wiring to the power supply module and the power supply voltage are correct and power on the standby system When the standby system is powered on the BACKUP LED of the redundant function module in the control system turns on...

Страница 522: ...er system 5 Check the modules for errors Check that no error has occurred on the CPU module or redundant function module in the standby system If the ERROR LED of either of the modules is on or flashes check the cause of an error and eliminate the error cause Replacing I O modules The following describes the procedure for replacing I O modules 1 Check the system of the replacement target power sup...

Страница 523: ... module Replacing a main base unit The following describes the procedure for replacing the main base unit 1 Check the system of the replacement target power supply module Check the CTRL LED and SBY LED of the redundant function module in the system of the replacement target module for the following The target module is in the standby system in this case The CTRL LED is off and the SBY LED flashes ...

Страница 524: ...522 30 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION FOR A REDUNDANT SYSTEM 30 1 Module Replacement in the Redundant System MEMO ...

Страница 525: ...apters Please read these chapters when using the Safety CPU Since information same as that of the standard CPU is not described in these chapters refer to Part 1 to Part 3 31 RUNNING A SAFETY PROGRAM 32 MEMORY SPECIFICATIONS 33 FUNCTIONS 34 SAFETY DEVICES SAFETY LABELS AND CONSTANTS ...

Страница 526: ...n module Devices labels that can be used in safety programs Only safety devices and safety labels can be used in safety programs Safety device Page 554 Safety Devices Safety label Page 559 Safety Label Safety program file FB file for the safety program Safety program file Standard program file FB file for the safety program FB file for the standard program Device label memory Data required for pro...

Страница 527: ...ndard Functions Function Blocks In safety programs the block number of the file register R is not saved or restored Data in the index register Z LZ are not saved or restored either Even if the operating status of Safety CPUs for which no safety program has been registered is STOP or PAUSE safety program operations other than operation processing are performed Consequently the standard control proc...

Страница 528: ...cle processing error error code 1A01H is detected at the Safety CPU and the safety program is executed at the next safety cycle time Also if execution of the program is completed after the safety cycle time has been exceeded the safety cycle processing time execution cycle error flag turns on and the safety cycle processing time execution cycle error count is incremented by one as follows Program ...

Страница 529: ... Displayed items If an instruction with long processing time is executed in the standard program the start of safety cycle processing is delayed To prioritize safety cycle processing set Enable for the enabling interrupt setting during command execution Page 77 Interrupt enabled during instruction execution Item Description Setting range Default Safety Cycle Time Set a timing safety cycle time for...

Страница 530: ... programs is the same as the following Page 88 Operation Processing When Operating Status Is Changed Safety CPU operating status Safety communications processing RUN state Executes the set safety communications STOP state Executes the set safety communications however send data is turned off 0 1 2 PAUSE state Executes the set safety communications however send data is turned off 0 1 Safety CPU Ope...

Страница 531: ...bel Memory Area Setting of the engineering tool Page 544 Device Label Memory Area Setting Data to be allocated The following table lists the data allocated to each area Area Application Standard device area Standard user devices Safety device label area Safety device area Safety user devices Safety label area Safety global labels and safety local labels Safety local device area Safety local device...

Страница 532: ... CPU File size unit Program memory Device label memory Data memory R08SFCPU 128 bytes 512 bytes 2048 bytes R16SFCPU 4096 bytes R32SFCPU 8192 bytes R120SFCPU 16384 bytes Items to be specified in the engineering tool Target Initialization Data memory Deletes all the folders and files in the program memory and data memory Device label memory Deletes all the files in the file storage areas in the devi...

Страница 533: ... parameter relates to safety control inside the CPU parameters Page 936 Safety CPU parameters This item is yellow in the engineering tool CPU parameters File type CPU built in memory SD memory card File name and extension Program memory Device label memory Data memory Drive 0 Drive 3 Drive 4 Drive 2 Standard program 4 6 4 6 ANY_STRING PRG Standard FB file 4 4 ANY_STRING PFB Standard CPU parameter ...

Страница 534: ...PU Module Logging Configuration Tool 4 This parameter relates to safety control inside the CPU parameters Page 936 Safety CPU parameters This item is yellow in the engineering tool CPU parameters File type Operation using engineering tool Operation with SLMP and FTP server function Operation with instructions in standard programs Write Read Delete Write Read Delete Write Read Standard program 1 2 ...

Страница 535: ...ting is possible in file units however it is not possible to select files together with parameter files or files relating to safety and then write to the programmable controller CPU If writing in file units write after clearing the selection of other parameter files or files relating to safety or write after switching to TEST MODE File type Operation using engineering tool Operation with SLMP and ...

Страница 536: ...lue of a word type global label is set Initial local label value file File register 2048 bytes minimum when the setting capacity is 1K words Event history 1024 bytes minimum when the setting capacity is 1K words default setting is 131072 bytes Device data storage file 2048 bytes minimum when the setting capacity is 1K words General purpose data The size differs depending on the size of the file to...

Страница 537: ...e other is for operating the system as a safety system Page 537 Safety Operation Mode Continuous RUN prevention in TEST MODE Prevents the Safety CPU from running continuously for a long time in TEST MODE Page 541 Continuous RUN Prevention in TEST MODE Safety diagnostic function Self diagnostic function of the Safety CPU Page 542 Safety Diagnostic Function Safety data identify check Checks if the p...

Страница 538: ...off or reset of the CPU module is detected while the program restoration information is being written the processing will be suspended and a message will be displayed If the processing is suspended by a disconnection click the Retry button in the message after reconnecting cables If the processing is suspended by power off or reset login to the user authentication function is disabled Log in to th...

Страница 539: ...afety global devices safety local devices safety global labels safety local labels and standard safety shared labels To set an initial value to those devices and labels create a program so that the safety state can be secured and the value is set only at the start up Device label access service processing setting Even though this function is set the scan time of some functions operations becomes l...

Страница 540: ...l be SAFETY MODE wait for restart The status will be wait for restart until the CPU module is powered off or is reset An error occur if the Safety CPU is switched to RUN status when in SAFETY MODE wait for restart 2 After switching the safety operation mode TEST MODE SAFETY MODE the mode will switch to SAFETY MODE when the CPU module is powered off and on or is reset 3 After switching the safety o...

Страница 541: ... mode will revert to the default mode TEST MODE All programmable controller information can be initialized regardless of the safety operation mode Safety operation mode state Status transition by operation Power off on or reset Safety operation mode switching operation TEST MODE SAFETY MODE SAFETY MODE TEST MODE TEST MODE TEST MODE SAFETY MODE wait for restart SAFETY MODE SAFETY MODE TEST MODE SAF...

Страница 542: ...rameter Safety program Safety FB file Safety global label setting file Standard safety shared label setting file SAFETY MODE TEST MODE The user who is making the switch has Developers access level or higher and is currently logged on The safety operation mode is currently set to SAFETY MODE or SAFETY MODE wait for restart Operation Restrictions Writing data to the programmable controller Data cann...

Страница 543: ...TY MODE An error is cleared Setting method Set the continuous RUN allowed time in TEST MODE CPU Parameter RAS Setting RnSFCPU Operation Mode Setting Window Displayed items Checking the continuous RUN time in TEST MODE The continuous RUN time in TEST MODE can be checked at SD1840 and SD1841 Continuous RUN time in TEST MODE Page 833 List of Special Register Areas Also if the permissible TEST MODE co...

Страница 544: ...ystem diagnosis Time monitoring Monitors the execution status of the respective Safety CPU and safety function module processing Always 3E61H Microcomputer diagnosis Detects microcomputer internal register errors When power is turned off and on When the CPU module is reset When END processing is performed 3C00H 3C01H Power supply voltage monitoring Power supply voltage monitoring Detects voltage e...

Страница 545: ...arison result Online Safety PLC Operation Safety Data Identify Check For details refer to the following GX Works3 Operating Manual 33 5 Safety Communication Function This function communicates data between the Safety CPU and modules supporting safety functions using safety protocols The Safety CPU performs safety communications between safety stations using the following network CC Link IE Field N...

Страница 546: ...igned to the standard local device area The remaining area will be an unused area R08SFCPU 50K words R16SFCPU 60K words R32SFCPU 70K words R120SFCPU 90K words The safety local device area capacity obtained by subtracting the total capacity of the safety device area and safety label area from the safety device label memory capacity is set Item R08SFCPU R16SFCPU R32SFCPU R120SFCPU Standard device ar...

Страница 547: ...words 2 to 2902K words 2 to 4950K words Safety device area 1 to 40K words 1 to 40K words 1 to 40K words 1 to 40K words 1 to 40K words Safety label area 0 to 39K words 0 to 39K words 0 to 39K words 0 to 39K words 0 to 39K words Safety local device area Setting disabled Setting disabled Setting disabled Setting disabled Setting disabled Standard safety shared label area 0 to 40K words 0 to 40K words...

Страница 548: ...rds 0 to 39K words 0 to 39K words 0 to 39K words 0 to 39K words Safety local device area Setting disabled Setting disabled Setting disabled Setting disabled Setting disabled Standard safety shared label area 0 to 40K words 0 to 40K words 0 to 40K words 0 to 40K words 0 to 40K words Standard label area 0 to 1682K words 0 to 2194K words 0 to 2706K words 0 to 3730K words 0 to 5778K words Standard lat...

Страница 549: ...MB 4MB 8MB Not Mounted Device Label Memory Area Capacity Setting Standard Device Area Standard Device Area Capacity Set the capacity of the device area used for standard global devices Page 545 Setting range of capacity of each area Page 544 Default capacity Standard Label Area Standard Label Area Capacity Set the capacity of the label area used for standard global labels and standard local labels...

Страница 550: ...ing unit Bit Input X X0 to X2FFF Output Y Y0 to Y2FFF Internal relay M M0 to M94674943 64 points Link relay B B0 to B5A49FFF 64 points Annunciator F F0 to F32767 64 points Link special relay SB SB0 to SB5A49FFF 64 points Edge relay V V0 to V32767 64 points Latch relay L L0 to L32767 64 points Word Timer T T0 to T5259711 32 points Retentive timer ST ST0 to ST5259711 32 points Long timer LT LT0 to L...

Страница 551: ...interval only Each scanning cycle can be set Trigger conditions Only standard devices can be specified as monitoring data of when Device change specification is selected as the trigger condition Step No specification can be selected only for standard programs Output settings With the Safety CPU even if set to Output with device comment in the output settings Device comment output item device comme...

Страница 552: ... errors currently occurred or events can be checked on the Module Diagnostics window GX Works3 Operating Manual Error detection setting Applicable errors to the error detection setting The following table lists errors in the Safety CPU for which whether or not to detect the errors can be set CPU parameter setting for when an error is detected The Instruction Execution Error setting under the CPU M...

Страница 553: ...derate error 1200H Module major error 2441H 2442H 2450H Error name Error code Another CPU module moderate error 1220H Another CPU module major error 2461H 2462H 2470H Error name Error code Power shutoff 1000H ROM write count error 1080H Battery error 1090H Memory card access error 1100H SNTP clock setting error 1120H Default gateway gateway IP address error 1124H Own node port number error 1128H O...

Страница 554: ...ions 1A40H 1 Parameter mismatch in safety communication destination station 1A50H 1 Device mismatch in safety communication destination station 1A51H 1 Device version mismatch in safety communication destination station 1A52H 1 Timeout in safety communications 1A60H 1 1A61H 1 1A62H 1 1A63H 1 1A64H 1 1A65H 1 1A66H 1 Safety communications receipt data error 1A70H 1 1A71H 1 1A72H 1 1A73H 1 Memory car...

Страница 555: ...ors with the module diagnostics function of GX Works3 GX Works3 Operating Manual Using the buffer memory Clear errors using operations of buffer memory 1 Check the standard program and identify the detected continuation error using Un G0 Latest self diagnostic error code 2 Eliminate the cause of the detected continuation error 3 Set 1 in Un G50 Error clear in the standard program to clear the erro...

Страница 556: ...ndard devices used for the Safety CPU refer to the following Page 330 DEVICES Classification Type Device name Symbol Number of points default Changeability with parameter settings Notation Safety user devices Bit Safety input SA X 8K points Selectable either 8K or 12K points 1 Hexadecimal Bit Safety output SA Y 8K points Hexadecimal Bit Safety internal relay SA M 6K points Changeable Page 548 Safe...

Страница 557: ...Safety CPU turn off all safety internal relays Powering off and on Reset Safety link relay SA B The safety link relay is used as a device when sending and receiving safety data between Safety CPUs over CC Link IE Field Network Refreshing network modules using safety link relay Data is sent and received between Safety CPUs The safety communications send receive device range is set in the CC Link IE...

Страница 558: ...esent is added to the current value when the OUT SA T instruction is executed If the safety timer coil is off at the execution of the OUT SA T instruction the current value is not updated The maximum response accuracy of the timer is the elapsed time since previous safety cycle processing was started until the present timer limit setting Ex Timer limit setting 10ms SA T0 setting value 8 Safety cyc...

Страница 559: ...ff the contact issue the RST SA C instruction When the RST SA C instruction is executed the counter value is cleared and the contact is turned off Safety data register SA D This device can store numerical values Safety link register SA W This register is used as a device when sending and receiving safety data between Safety CPUs over CC Link IE Field Network Refreshing network modules using safety...

Страница 560: ...y the following calculation formula Set the number of safety local device points used so that the number is equal to or less than the capacity of the safety local device area Total number of safety local device points used A 16 B C 2 16 D A Number of points of the safety local device SA M B Number of points of the safety local devices SA D SA T current value SA ST current value and SA C current va...

Страница 561: ... standard safety shared label Safety labels and standard safety shared labels cannot be used as alias source of a standard label GX Works3 Operating Manual How to use standard safety shared labels A standard safety shared label is used to pass device data from a safety program to a standard program and vice versa When a standard safety shared label is used in a safety program as shown in the examp...

Страница 562: ... to the standard program via the standard safety shared label safe_state and the status is controlled with the annunciator No 5 If an error is detected with the annunciator the corresponding annunciator number is output to Y20 Standard program 0 4 8 When the safe state signal turns off the annunciator No 5 turns on The annunciator number detected by SM62 Annunciator is output to Y20 When the safe ...

Страница 563: ...pplicable The following table lists the availability of the classes of safety local labels Applicable Not applicable Class Availability Safety global label Standard safety shared label VAR_GLOBAL VAR_GLOBAL_CONSTANT VAR_GLOBAL_RETAIN Class Availability Safety program Safety function Safety function block VAR VAR_CONSTANT VAR_RETAIN VAR_INPUT VAR_OUTPUT VAR_OUTPUT_RETAIN VAR_IN_OUT VAR_PUBLIC VAR_P...

Страница 564: ...ucture definition 34 5 Constants The decimal constant K and hexadecimal constant H can be used in safety programs The specification method is the same as that for standard programs Example K1234 H1FFF Page 401 CONSTANTS Data type Availability Bit BOOL Word unsigned bit string 16 bits WORD Double word unsigned bit string 32 bits DWORD Word signed INT Double word signed DINT Single precision real nu...

Страница 565: ...CPU Since information same as that of the standard CPU is not described in these chapters refer to Part 1 to Part 3 35 BASIC CONCEPT 36 PROCEDURE FOR STARTING UP A SYSTEM USING THE SIL2 PROCESS CPU 37 FUNCTIONS 38 SAFETY DEVICES SAFETY LABELS AND CONSTANTS 39 PRECAUTIONS ON PROGRAMMING 40 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION FOR A SYSTEM USING SIL2 PROCESS CPU ...

Страница 566: ...the modules on the slots from the CPU slot to slot number 1 in the order of the SIL2 Process CPU SIL2 function module and redundant function module The mounting positions and order are as described above They cannot be changed I O modules and intelligent function modules set to SIL2 mode are mounted to the intelligent device station remote head module on CC Link IE Field Network 1 For details on m...

Страница 567: ...ystem Data link is performed between the redundant function modules connected with tracking cables and data required for operation is transferred tracking transfer at every scan from the control system to the standby system If an error occurs in the control system the standby system will function as the new control system and continue the control using the data that the system has received For det...

Страница 568: ...n error or failure has occurred in the control system the standby system is switched to the control system to continue the operation Even if a system failure has occurred in the control system the standby system continues the operation because data is transferred from the control system to the standby system at every scan Safety operation mode Description SAFETY MODE Mode for operating the safety ...

Страница 569: ...es value changes from the test function or monitor windows and change requests from other external devices Safety global devices Safety local devices Safety global labels Safety local labels Standard safety shared labels Memory operation Memory operations for the CPU built in memory including extended SRAM cassette cannot be performed from the engineering tool Page 585 Memory operation However SD ...

Страница 570: ... of CPU Parameter Page 652 Redundant System Operation Setting 2 The program operation is not performed with the default setting Programs are executed according to Both Systems Program Executions Setting in Program Setting of CPU Parameter Page 647 Program Execution in Both Systems Processing Control system Standby system Initial processing initial processing when switched to RUN I O refresh 1 Prog...

Страница 571: ...ntrol system and system B as the standby system Checking method Check the LED of each redundant function module to check the status of the control system standby system Users can check the status of the control system standby system with the engineering tool GX Works3 Operating Manual System monitor Monitor status bar Precautions If the system A B settings have not been set for both systems or the...

Страница 572: ... on or is reset During diagnostics of the SD memory card tracking communications are disabled If diagnostics of the SD memory card on the other system are not completed in the timeout period set in Other system Start up Timeout Setting a stop error occurs on the own system If diagnostics of the SD memory card takes time on the other system a stop error occurs on the other system as well In this ca...

Страница 573: ...p Timeout Setting of CPU Parameter to Not Set Precautions To start up the system that is waiting for the start up of the other system as the control system check that the other system is not operating as the control system When tracking communications are established by connecting the other system with a tracking cable or powering on or resetting the CPU module in the other system the CPU module t...

Страница 574: ...rk System configuration The following figure shows a configuration example of the system 1 Starting up one system is allowed without the CC Link IE Field Network master local module Wiring example The following figure shows a wiring example TD is an on delay timer wired externally Input the contact output of the on delay timer to X30 The 24V power supply is always input 1 Power supply module R61P ...

Страница 575: ... shorter than the above a stop error may occur on one system even though tracking cables are connected properly because turning on X30 Control System Start up Setting Input X starts this program example Parameter settings The following shows parameter settings System parameter Set the system parameter according to the system configuration in I O Assignment Setting CPU parameter program settings Se...

Страница 576: ...g Control System Start up Setting Input X set a switch for the input to X30 so that Control System Start up Setting Input X is enabled only when the switch is on 1 Set Not Set in Other system Start up Timeout Setting 2 Set Enable in Control System Start up Setting Input X 3 Set X30 in Input X 4 Set Detailed setting in Tracking Device Label Setting 5 Do not include X30 to X3F and Y40 to Y4F which a...

Страница 577: ...off Standby time setting 11 Set the standby time For the system A SM1632 set the standby time longer Standby processing 17 to 25 If the control system is started up with the on delay timer X30 the system stands by temporarily If both systems start up successfully the system does not stand by Condition judgment of the other system 32 When the other system is operating and the own system is the syst...

Страница 578: ...r does not occur because an initial execution type program is not executed on the other system If a stop error has occurred in this program the possible cause is a tracking cables failure Check the connection of tracking cables and power off and on or reset the CPU module on the system in which the stop error has occurred ...

Страница 579: ...cuting a system switching instruction when the CPU module in the system A is set to the RUN state for the first time switches the system B to the control system Turn on SM1646 System switching by a user in advance Operation example 1 Both systems are temporarily powered off due to a power failure or other causes while the system B is operating as the control system 2 The system A is started as the...

Страница 580: ...ckup mode System A Off System B Control system System A Control system System B Standby system System A Standby system System B Control system System A is powered off Systems are switched System A Control system System B Off System A is powered off System A is powered on System switching System B is powered off System B is powered on Both systems are powered on Both systems are powered off 1 Syste...

Страница 581: ...nction module Devices labels that can be used in safety programs Only safety devices and safety labels can be used in safety programs Safety device Page 554 Safety Devices Safety Label Page 681 Safety Label Safety program file FB file for the safety program Safety program file Standard program file FB file for the safety program FB file for the standard program Device label memory Data required fo...

Страница 582: ...tandard Functions Function Blocks In safety programs the block number of the file register R is not saved or restored Data in the index register Z LZ are not saved or restored either Even if the operating status of SIL2 Process CPUs for which no safety program has been registered is STOP or PAUSE safety program operations other than operation processing are performed Consequently the standard cont...

Страница 583: ...ycle processing error error code 1A01H is detected at the SIL2 Process CPU and the safety program is executed at the next safety cycle time Also if execution of the program is completed after the safety cycle time has been exceeded the safety cycle processing time execution cycle error flag turns on and the safety cycle processing time execution cycle error count is incremented by one as follows P...

Страница 584: ...ayed items If an instruction with long processing time is executed in the standard program the start of safety cycle processing is delayed To prioritize safety cycle processing set Enable for the enabling interrupt setting during command execution Page 77 Interrupt enabled during instruction execution Item Description Setting range Default Safety Cycle Time Set a timing safety cycle time for execu...

Страница 585: ...on processing with standard programs is the same as the following Page 88 Operation Processing When Operating Status Is Changed SIL2 Process CPU operating status Safety communications processing RUN state Executes the set safety communications STOP state Executes the set safety communications however send data is turned off 0 1 2 PAUSE state Executes the set safety communications however send data...

Страница 586: ...Device Label Memory Area Setting Data to be allocated The following table lists the data allocated to each area Safety devices and safety labels cannot be latched and therefore there is no latch area for safety devices and safety labels Area Application Standard device area Standard user devices Safety device label area Safety device area Safety user devices Safety label area Safety global labels ...

Страница 587: ...PSFCPU 128 bytes 512 bytes 2048 bytes R16PSFCPU 4096 bytes R32PSFCPU 8192 bytes R120PSFCPU 16384 bytes Items to be specified in the engineering tool Target Initialization Data memory Deletes all the folders and files in the program memory and data memory Device label memory Deletes all the files in the file storage areas in the device label memory SD memory card Deletes all the folders and files i...

Страница 588: ... item is yellow in the engineering tool CPU parameters 8 The module specific backup parameter is a file for storing the save or restore data of the module to be replaced by the online module change function For details refer to the manual for the module used File type CPU built in memory SD memory card File name and extension Program memory Device label memory Data memory Drive 0 Drive 3 Drive 4 D...

Страница 589: ...fety control inside the CPU parameters Page 936 Safety CPU parameters This item is yellow in the engineering tool CPU parameters 4 Operation is possible only when the operating status of the SIL2 Process CPU is STOP PAUSE A communication error occurs when the file is operated in the RUN state File type Operation using engineering tool Operation with SLMP and FTP server function Operation with inst...

Страница 590: ...es together with parameter files or files relating to safety and then write to the programmable controller CPU If writing in file units write after clearing the selection of other parameter files or files relating to safety or write after switching to TEST MODE 5 Operation is possible only when the operating status of the SIL2 Process CPU is STOP PAUSE A communication error occurs when the file is...

Страница 591: ...d device is set Standard global label setting file Approx 716 bytes minimum when a word type global label is set Label initial value file Global label initial value file Approx 140 bytes minimum when the initial value of a word type global label is set Local label initial value file File register 2048 bytes minimum when the setting capacity is 1K words Event history 1024 bytes minimum when the set...

Страница 592: ...talling mounting inserting procedure 1 Installing batteries Install a battery to the SIL2 Process CPU of each system MELSEC iQ R CPU Module User s Manual Startup 2 Inserting extended SRAM cassettes and SD memory cards Insert an extended SRAM cassette or an SD memory card or both to the SIL2 Process CPU of each system as needed MELSEC iQ R CPU Module User s Manual Startup Do not power off or reset ...

Страница 593: ...al Startup 4 Initializing the remote head module Initialize the remote head module with the engineering tool MELSEC iQ R CC Link IE Field Network Remote Head Module User s Manual Startup 5 Setting parameters for the remote head module side Set system parameters CPU parameters and module parameters of each module MELSEC iQ R CC Link IE Field Network Remote Head Module User s Manual Application Set ...

Страница 594: ...d the SIL2 Process CPUs Connect the personal computer on which the engineering tool has been installed and the SIL2 Process CPUs 4 Initializing the SIL2 Process CPU Initialize the SIL2 Process CPUs with the engineering tool After initializing a SIL2 Process CPU connect the other SIL2 Process CPU and the personal computer Initialize the other SIL2 Process CPU in the same way 5 Setting parameters fo...

Страница 595: ...ng states The CARD READY LED status depends on whether an SD memory card has been installed to each CPU module or not 1 In a redundant master station system the MST LED of the master local module in the standby system flashes When one system has been started up a continuation error occurs since only the control system has been started up Thus the ERROR LED of the SIL2 Process CPU and the L ERR LED...

Страница 596: ...position and power on the systems Procedure for checking the operation 1 Checking the operation Check each module status and program operation used in the systems Check if an error has occurred in each module Check that the LEDs of each module are in the following states 1 In a redundant master station system the MST LED of the master local module in the standby system flashes 2 In a redundant mas...

Страница 597: ... is normally running on the engineering tool Starting up the standby system When only the control system is started up first start up the standby system subsequently When both systems are started up simultaneously this procedure is not required Start up the standby system while the control system keeps operating Perform the same procedures as those for starting up the control system Page 590 Insta...

Страница 598: ...ing states The CARD READY LED status depends on whether an SD memory card has been installed to each CPU module or not 5 Clearing errors When the ERROR LED of the SIL2 Process CPU of the control system is on clear the error with the engineering tool Page 669 Using the engineering tool 6 Checking the operation Page 594 Procedure for checking the operation Control system Standby system ...

Страница 599: ...ect the OUT connector of the system A and the IN connector of the system B 2 Pull each cable lightly and check that it has been connected securely Disconnection procedure 1 Disconnect the tracking cables while pressing the connector hook Precautions There are restrictions on the cable bending radius For details refer to the specifications of the tracking cables used Place the cables in a duct or c...

Страница 600: ...ected and connect modules at the shortest distance Also use the thickest wire maximum 2 to reduce the voltage drop For the wiring to a terminal block use a solderless terminal To prevent the short circuit because of loosening screws use the solderless terminal with an insulation sleeve of 0 8mm or less Note that up to two solderless terminals can be connected per terminal block Ground the LG and F...

Страница 601: ...e added For details on the access level refer to the following GX Works3 Operating Manual 1 Select a SIL2 Process CPU to be used for Type The setting for Mode is fixed to Redundant Select a programming language to be used for Programming Language and click the OK button 2 When creating a new project registration of user information for the user authentication function is required Set a user name a...

Страница 602: ... GX Works3 Operating Manual 1 Connect a CPU module to the personal computer with a USB cable or an Ethernet cable The CPU module connected with a USB cable or an Ethernet cable becomes own system 2 Select Online Current Connection Destination from the menu of the engineering tool 3 Click the CPU Module Direct Coupled Setting button on the Specify Connection Destination Connection window 4 Select a...

Страница 603: ...a system that has no system A B setting yet is connected to the system specified as system A the system that has no system A B setting will be automatically set to system B This event is not recorded in the event history If a system specified as system A is connected to another system specified as system A the system where the CPU module is turned off and on or reset will be automatically set to s...

Страница 604: ...ormation cannot be deleted Only changing the set system A B information is supported When starting up both systems if both systems have no system A B setting yet or the same system A B setting a stop error will occur when tracking communications are established Set a different system A B setting for each system If the system that has no system A B setting yet is started first a stop error will occ...

Страница 605: ... module extension parameters When new parameters have been set or the set parameters have been changed reset the CPU module MELSEC iQ R CPU Module User s Manual Startup Use the Select Favorites button to register frequently used items such as system parameters CPU parameters and programs Select Setting Register Favorites Selection from the menu on the Online Data Operation window and set the items...

Страница 606: ...nation with the engineering tool and check the operating status of the system A or B Online Current Connection Destination For how to check the operation refer to the following GX Works3 Operating Manual 1 Select a system in Specify Redundant CPU on the Specify Connection Destination Connection window 2 Click the Connection Test button to check whether the CPU module of the selected system has bee...

Страница 607: ...consistency check Checks whether the system configurations and files in the CPU modules are the same between the control system and the standby system Page 642 System Consistency Check Program execution in both systems Detects an error in the external device or network of the systems control system and standby system by executing a program that diagnoses external devices or networks of both system...

Страница 608: ...unction Clock setting When setting clock data for the Safety CPU at the Set Clock window of the engineering tool All Stations Specified cannot be selected as an execution target Time synchronization The time of the standby system is synchronized with the time of the control system The time setting using the time setting function SNTP client is available only for the control system System clock Aft...

Страница 609: ... the special relay SM50 or the connected engineering tool An error on the standby system CPU module can be cleared by using the special relay SM1679 of the control system CPU module Page 671 Error clear Page 673 Clearing errors on the standby system CPU module from the control system CPU module Event history function Events in the SIL2 Process CPU are added Note that events that occur on the SIL2 ...

Страница 610: ... cannot be set for safety global devices safety local devices safety global labels safety local labels and standard safety shared labels To set an initial value for those devices or labels create a program so that the safety state can be secured and the value is set only at start up Device label access service processing setting Even though this function is set the scan time of some functions oper...

Страница 611: ...rated When multiple system switching causes are simultaneously generated the systems are switched according to the cause with higher priority The switching cause determined according to the priority is stored in the event history and SD1643 System switching cause The manual system switching is requested for the control system CPU module The systems are not switched even when the CPU module is set ...

Страница 612: ...system A CPU module is turned off When a network is established using the CC Link IE Field Network module the systems can be switched even when a redundant function module is removed from the base unit or a failure has occurred in the base unit Stop error of the CPU module When a stop error occurs on the control system CPU module the standby system is notified of a system switching due to the stop...

Страница 613: ...twork module The following network modules send a system switching request CC Link IE Controller Network module CC Link IE Field Network module Ethernet interface module with built in CC Link IE If a network module cable is disconnected the systems may not be switched depending on the timing of error detection on the control system and the timing on the standby system Page 621 When the cable for t...

Страница 614: ... transferred the CPU modules in both of the control system and standby system have the same specified devices and labels Thus if the systems are switched by using the SP CONTSW instruction on the control system CPU module switching may also be performed on the new control system CPU module When the SP CONTSW instruction is used create a program that does not execute the SP CONTSW instruction again...

Страница 615: ...END processing Switch the systems from the Redundant Operation window of the engineering tool Online Redundant PLC Operation Redundant Operation Ex Operation of system switching from the engineering tool END Program executed System switching request from an engineering tool System A System B System switching Standby system Program stopped Program executed Control system Control system Program stop...

Страница 616: ...line File batch online change Standard program Write operation at system switching continues Safety program Safety programs cannot be changed online Device label memory standard label safety label standard safety shared label The state before system switching is held Signal flow memory standard safety program With tracking setting The signal flow of the old control system is reflected The state be...

Страница 617: ...is executed FROM TO instructions In the program execution after system switching this instruction is executed when the instruction execution condition is satisfied No operation is performed because the program does not operate 1 Instruction that requires several scans This instruction is executed in the program execution after system switching When the systems are switched while the instruction is...

Страница 618: ...may occur on the new standby system Page 644 File 6 Although the control system CPU module is switched to the standby system CPU module the existing standby system is not switched 7 The initial processing of the safety function after system switching completes is also included Status of system using the SIL2 Process CPU Execution availability of system switching Automatic system switching Manual s...

Страница 619: ... the system switching instruction ID number specified with the SP CONTSW instruction is also stored Special relay Special register System switching results and detailed information can be checked with the special relay and special register Whether the systems have been switched or not can be checked by checking SD1649 System switching cause when the systems are successfully switched When the syste...

Страница 620: ...stem CPU module SM1637 System switching detection standby system to control system SM1643 ON for only one scan after system switching standby system to control system SM1644 ON for only one scan after system switching control system to standby system SM1645 System switching request from a network module SM1646 System switching by a user SD number Name Storage status at system switching New control...

Страница 621: ...l system switching is disabled during an online change Page 620 System switching disabled by online change Operation of an event execution type program When ON of bit data TRUE has been specified in the trigger type and the systems are switched before tracking transfer of device data an event execution type program does not operate in the new control system When the cable for the network module is...

Страница 622: ...ff and on or reset the CPU module of one system so that the other system will operate as the control system If a WDT error or a hardware failure of the CPU module has occurred in the control system while a stop error exists in the standby system the control system is switched to the standby system and the both systems operate as standby systems In this case eliminate error causes and then power of...

Страница 623: ...tial processing when switched to RUN When a system switching cause has been generated during initial processing or initial processing when switched to RUN on the standby system whether the systems are switched or not depends on the system switching cause 1 When the control system detects cable disconnection first the systems are switched 2 When the standby system detects cable disconnection first ...

Страница 624: ... SD1667 to SD1670 assigned for each tracking block Up to 1M word standard device standard label data can be transferred in one scan During an online change or when a stop error has occurred tracking transfer is performed only for system data Page 625 System data In the CPU parameters Tracking Device Label Setting under Tracking Setting in Redundant System Settings is set to Transfer collectively b...

Страница 625: ...peration mode is either TEST MODE or SAFETY MODE Item Transfer Reference Device data User device Page 624 Devices that can be specified Safety user device 5 Special relay 1 Safety special relay Special register 1 Safety special register Index register File register Refresh data register Global label 3 4 Standard global label Page 629 Tracking device label setting Safety global label 5 Page 631 Saf...

Страница 626: ...e timer ST Long timer LT Long retentive timer LST Counter C Long counter LC Data register D Link register W Link special register SW Latch relay L Safety user device Safety input SA X Safety output SA Y Safety internal relay SA M Safety link relay SA B Safety timer SA T Safety retentive timer SA ST Safety counter SA C Safety data register SA D Safety link register SA W System device Function input...

Страница 627: ... Name SM752 Dedicated instruction End bit control flag SM754 BIN DBIN instruction error control flag SM755 Scaling data check settings SM756 Module access completion wait control flag SM775 Selection of link refresh processing during the COM instruction execution SM776 Local device setting at CALL SM777 Local device setting in interrupt programs SM792 PID bumpless processing for the complete diffe...

Страница 628: ...ting a tracking transfer range of global devices and whether or not to transfer local devices global labels local labels Up to 64 blocks No 1 to 64 are available Up to 2048 devices can be set in a block Up to 2048 devices can be transferred in a single tracking The available capacity of tracking devices or labels is 1M words per block Ex When only the tracking block No 3 has no setting Global labe...

Страница 629: ... by the system at initial processing or operating status change from STOP to RUN and the tracking transfer is started Ex Program example for changing the status of tracking transfer triggers according to conditions Setting procedure for tracking transfer The following describes the setting procedure for tracking transfer 1 Set Tracking Setting and Safety Tracking Setting in the CPU parameters Page...

Страница 630: ...g Reflection button in the Global Device Setting window Page 631 Global device setting Item Description Setting range Default Signal Flow Memory Tracking Setting Set whether to transfer the signal flow memory or not Page 629 Tracking transfer setting for the signal flow memory Do Not Transfer Transfer Transfer Tracking Device Label Setting Set Transfer collectively or Detailed setting for devices ...

Страница 631: ...cally transferring all the devices and labels in a batch or transferring specified devices and labels of a specified tracking block Batch transfer When Tracking Device Label Setting is set to Transfer collectively the following devices and labels are assigned to the tracking block No 1 and automatically transferred 1 The data used in both systems execution programs is not transferred 2 Global labe...

Страница 632: ...ed devices When setting devices and labels for tracking transfer click the Size Calculation button to check if the tracking data capacity in one scan is equal to or less than 1M words Item Item Description Setting range Default Device Detailed Setting Global Device Setting Set global devices to be transferred Page 631 Global device setting 0 0K Word Local Device Setting Set whether to transfer loc...

Страница 633: ...parameter Except for the annunciator F link special relay SB and link special register SW Tracking block No Select the number of a tracking block to be set File Register Setting Enter a file name of the file register file This item is valid only when the file register ZR is selected in the device name field Device Select a device to be transferred Page 624 Devices that can be specified Start End S...

Страница 634: ... changed the tracking mode will not change Item Description Synchronous tracking mode Tracking data is always transferred to the standby system once every scan of the control system During a tracking transfer from the control system to the standby system the next scan does not start in the control system Asynchronous tracking mode When a tracking transfer from the control system is to be performed...

Страница 635: ...stem sends the tracking data 3 Sending tracking data The control system sends the tracking data 4 Waiting for completion of tracking data reception The control system waits for a notification of receive completion from the standby system After receiving the notification of the receive completion from the standby system the control system starts another END processing Item Description 5 Tracking re...

Страница 636: ...scription 1 Tracking send processing 2 Waiting for completion of tracking data reflection After receiving a notification of the reflection completion from the standby system the control system sends the tracking data When a notification of reflection completion is not arrived 4 the control system does not send tracking data in the scan 3 Sending tracking data The control system sends the tracking ...

Страница 637: ...ices standard local devices standard global labels standard local labels are not transferred in the scan In this case check which tracking trigger turned on in the event history of the engineering tool and set the tracking data capacity within 1M words Even though the size of the tracking data to be transferred is 1M words or less the size of the data may become larger than 1M words depending on t...

Страница 638: ...l devices are transferred even when the tracking transfer settings differ between the both systems However devices that are included in the device range settings of the control system CPU module and not included in the device range settings of the standby system CPU module are not reflected to the standby system CPU module The standby system CPU module reflects values according to the device range...

Страница 639: ...m folder MELPRJ SD memory card copying only the files in the system folder MELPRJ System memory copying only the user management information file For the CPU built in memory the memory copy is executed regardless of whether or not there are differences between the control system and standby system For the SD memory card the memory copy is executed only when there are differences between the contro...

Страница 640: ... the security key of the CPU module is not copied Starting up the CPU module without re writing of the security key causes an error of the CPU module because the security keys do not match between those program files and the CPU module If the security key of the CPU module is written in an extended SRAM cassette the replaced CPU module can take over the security key by simply replacing the extende...

Страница 641: ...of Special Register Areas Execution of memory copy The memory copy can be executed regardless of the operating statuses RUN STOP PAUSE stop error of the control system and standby system CPU modules However execution availability differs depending on the safety operation mode Can be executed Cannot be executed Item Description Reference Memory copy with the engineering tool Executes the memory cop...

Страница 642: ... user with the Administrator access level of the user authentication function logs on Execute the memory copy only in the logged on state 4 Select Memory Copy in the Redundant Operation window and click Execute During the memory copy the MEMORY COPY LEDs of the redundant function modules in both systems flash at 200ms intervals 5 When the memory copy is completed the MEMORY COPY LED of the control...

Страница 643: ...used in the control system and standby system An online operation is performed from the engineering tool The systems are being switched An online module change is being performed for replacing a redundant function module or modules of the standby system The memory copy has been executed on the standby system The safety operation mode of the standby system is SAFETY MODE Memory copy cannot be execu...

Страница 644: ...s whether the system configurations and files in the CPU modules are the same between the control system and the standby system The following table lists the items to be checked in the system consistency check Number in figure Item Description Reference 1 File Parameter file program file and other files Page 644 File 2 Operating status Operating status of CPU module RUN STOP PAUSE Page 645 Operati...

Страница 645: ...ng At online change completion At system switching When a tracking cable is reconnected Operating status 1 When the standby system is turned on or reset while the control system is operating When the operating status of the CPU module is switched from STOP to RUN At END processing When a tracking cable is reconnected Mounting status of main base unit When both systems are simultaneously turned on ...

Страница 646: ...ollowing methods Writing the correct project to the standby system Page 603 Writing Data to the Programmable Controller Executing the memory copy from the control system to the standby system for storing the same files in both systems Page 637 Memory Copy from Control System to Standby System File type Check target memory Built in memory of CPU module SD memory card 3 Program 1 FB file 1 CPU param...

Страница 647: ...n if the CPU modules of both systems are in different statuses CPU Parameter Redundant System Settings Redundant Behavior Setting Backup Mode Setting Window Displayed items Mounting status of main base unit The system consistency check is performed for the following items Models of CPU modules Models and types of modules mounted on each slot Operation of when a mismatch is detected If a mismatch b...

Страница 648: ...on the control system CPU module as well Safety operation mode Whether the safety operation modes SAFETY MODE TEST MODE of the CPU modules of both systems are the same is checked Operation of when a mismatch is detected If a mismatch is detected between the safety operation modes a continuation error occurs on the standby system CPU module The BACKUP LEDs of the redundant function modules of the c...

Страница 649: ...gram to be executed on both systems CPU Parameter Program Setting Window Displayed items 1 The diagnostic program set as a both systems execution program is executed 2 An error is detected on the standby system external device by the diagnostic program 3 The PALERT instruction is executed and the detailed information on a continuation error is displayed Item Description Setting range Default Both ...

Страница 650: ...en the control system and the standby system If the systems are switched in this state the program is started based on the different data causing an unintended operation The device label values to be used can be initialized by using SM1643 ON for only one scan after system switching standby system to control system and SM1644 ON for only one scan after system switching control system to standby sy...

Страница 651: ...his setting is in accordance with the parameter settings This setting is in accordance with the parameter settings File register setting The file register setting before system switching is held The file register setting before system switching is held Direct access input DX In the program execution after system switching data is fetched when an instruction using the direct access input DX is exec...

Страница 652: ... new control system CPU module The old standby system is switched to the new control system after the initial execution type program has been completed and then the initial execution type program is executed again Interrupt disabled or enabled state The control system and standby system have individual interrupt disabled or enabled state because the states are not transferred Tracking transfer Do ...

Страница 653: ...ing instruction or SCJ instruction in a program which is not set as a both systems execution program is called in the standby system Calling a subroutine program and turning the output off FCALL P Calling a subroutine program in the specified program file ECALL P Calling a subroutine program in the specified program file and turning the output off EFCALL P Calling a subroutine program with output ...

Страница 654: ...performed the outputs Y are overwritten with the control system data and output from the standby system Even though the standby system CPU module is in the STOP state the output Y received in tracking transfer is output Disable Enable Disable Backup Mode Setting Page 645 Operating status Page 646 Safety operation mode Control Standby System Start up Setting Other system Start up Timeout Setting Se...

Страница 655: ...ecution in Both Systems Operation at system switching The operation performed at the system switching differs when Standby System Output Setting is set to Enable The following table shows the operation performed when Standby System Output Setting has been set to Enable For the program execution in both systems refer to the following Page 647 Program Execution in Both Systems Item New control syste...

Страница 656: ...n in the test result window 7 When the test is completed successfully connect the control system and standby system with the tracking cable Page 597 Wiring the redundant function modules 8 Click the Close button in the Redundant Operation window to exit the module communication test 9 Set the CPU module operating status to the RUN state A tracking communication error is detected when a tracking ca...

Страница 657: ...mode will be SAFETY MODE wait for restart The status will be wait for restart until the CPU module is powered off or is reset An error occurs if the SIL2 Process CPU is switched to the RUN state when in SAFETY MODE wait for restart 2 After switching the safety operation mode TEST MODE SAFETY MODE the mode will switch to SAFETY MODE when the CPU module is powered off and on or is reset 3 After swit...

Страница 658: ...y operation mode will revert to the default mode TEST MODE All programmable controller information can be initialized regardless of the safety operation mode Safety operation mode status State transition by operation Power off on or reset Safety operation mode switching operation TEST MODE SAFETY MODE SAFETY MODE TEST MODE TEST MODE TEST MODE SAFETY MODE wait for restart SAFETY MODE SAFETY MODE TE...

Страница 659: ...cess of changing operating status The following files held by the engineering tool SIL2 Process CPU and SIL2 function module match Safety CPU parameter Safety module parameter Safety program Safety FB file Safety global label setting file Standard safety shared label setting file The following files are not being written from another engineering tool Safety CPU parameter Safety module parameter Sa...

Страница 660: ...stored in both the SIL2 Process CPU and SIL2 function module are the same At powering off and on At reset 2180H 3640H Operation result verification Output data verification Verifies output results calculated in the respective SIL2 Process CPU and SIL2 function module At safety cycle processing 3E60H System diagnosis Time monitoring Monitors the execution status of the respective SIL2 Process CPU a...

Страница 661: ...y protocols Safety communication processing is not performed in the SIL2 Process CPU of the standby system The SIL2 Process CPU performs safety communications between safety stations using the following network CC Link IE Field Network safety communication function For details on the function and settings required for safety communications refer to the following MELSEC iQ R CC Link IE Field Networ...

Страница 662: ...evice and sending receiving data in safety communications When safety communications are not recovered within the safety I O hold time When the safety communications are recovered within the safety I O hold time RM Safety refresh monitoring time Tioh Safety I O hold time SH Safety data holding time at a system switching 1 The safety communications are disconnected For the input values from the ext...

Страница 663: ...ayed items Note that the time until a timeout of safety communications increases in length by the amount of the setting value of the safety I O hold time Item Description Setting range Default Safety I O Hold Time Set the safety I O hold time If safety communications recovered successfully within the set safety I O hold time processing continues 0 0 to 180 0s in increments of 0 1s 10 0s ...

Страница 664: ...to step 3 When the verification result is matched but the program memory transfer window was not displayed at the online change the possible cause is that data transfer to the program memory has not been completed successfully Batch write files only to the control system and proceed to step 3 When the verification result is matched and the program memory transfer window is displayed the online cha...

Страница 665: ...e transfer setup of the engineering tool Currently Specified Station Online Remote Operation Remote operation performed on both systems When the following item is selected in Specify Execution Target the remote operation is performed on the CPU modules of both systems Specify Both Systems Online Remote Operation When Specify Redundant CPU is set to Not Specified in the transfer setup select All St...

Страница 666: ...m through another path the standby system CPU module cannot be reset by performing a remote RESET operation on the control system CPU module To perform a remote RESET operation on the CPU module of the control system or standby system use the path that was used to perform the remote operation on the standby system CPU module Cancel the remote operation first and perform the remote RESET operation ...

Страница 667: ... on the device label memory 1 1 The remaining capacity of other areas is automatically set as the capacity of the standard local device area and safety local device area Page 665 Default capacity R08PSFCPU Item R08PSFCPU R16PSFCPU R32PSFCPU R120PSFCPU Standard device area 40K words 40K words 40K words 40K words Safety device area 20K words 20K words 20K words 20K words Safety label area 20K words ...

Страница 668: ...ds Safety device area 1 to 40K words 1 to 40K words Safety label area 0 to 39K words 0 to 39K words Safety local device area Setting disabled Setting disabled Standard safety shared label area 0 to 40K words 0 to 40K words Standard label area 0 to 1150K words 0 to 5246K words Standard latch label area 0 to 1088K words 0 to 5184K words Standard local device area Setting disabled Setting disabled Fi...

Страница 669: ... 8MB Not Mounted Device Label Memory Area Capacity Setting Standard Device Area Standard Device Area Capacity Set the capacity of the device area used for standard global devices Page 665 Setting range of capacity of each area Page 665 Default capacity Standard Label Area Standard Label Area Capacity Set the capacity of the label area used for standard global labels and standard local labels Stand...

Страница 670: ...to M94674943 64 points Link relay B B0 to B5A49FFF 64 points Annunciator F F0 to F32767 64 points Link special relay SB SB0 to SB5A49FFF 64 points Edge relay V V0 to V32767 64 points Latch relay L L0 to L32767 64 points Word Timer T T0 to T5259711 32 points Retentive timer ST ST0 to ST5259711 32 points Long timer LT LT0 to LT1479295 1 point Long retentive timer LST LST0 to LST1479295 1 point Count...

Страница 671: ...n Un G0 Up to 16 error codes can be stored in Un G10 Self diagnostics error code 1 to Un G25 Self diagnostics error code 16 The error codes of the 17th error and later are not stored Using the LED on the safety function module Like intelligent function modules the error status can be checked with the ERROR LED MELSEC iQ R CPU Module User s Manual Startup Using the engineering tool Like intelligent...

Страница 672: ...PU module operation setting Applicable errors to the CPU module operation setting The following table lists the applicable errors to the setting that specifies the CPU module operation of when the specific errors have occurred in each intelligent function module in the system using the SIL2 Process CPU Error name Error code Memory card error 2120H 2121H Module verification error 2400H 2401H Fuse b...

Страница 673: ...s response send error 1133H TCP connection timeout 1134H IP address error 1152H Connection number acquisition error 1155H Receive buffer securement error 1157H UDP IP send failed 1165H TCP IP send failed 1166H Unsend data send error 1167H Redundant IP address error 1180H Module moderate error 1200H Another CPU module moderate error 1220H Annunciator ON 1800H Operation continuation error 1810H Rece...

Страница 674: ...errors with the module diagnostics function of GX Works3 GX Works3 Operating Manual Using the buffer memory Clear errors using operations of buffer memory 1 Check the standard program and identify the detected continuation error using Un G0 Latest self diagnostic error code 2 Eliminate the cause of the detected continuation error 3 Set 1 in Un G50 Error clear in the standard program to clear the e...

Страница 675: ...ultiple continuation errors have occurred all the errors are cleared at once Precautions Error clear operation with SM1679 can be performed by the control system CPU module only A continuation error on the standby system CPU module cannot be cleared by turning off and on SM1679 of the standby system CPU module The cause of an error which has occurred in a module other than the target CPU module fo...

Страница 676: ...ssued during the system switching and a communication error occurs If a communication error occurs while a data write command is being issued the data write command needs to be issued for the new control system Remote operation If a remote operation command is executed the CPU modules enter different operating statuses and thus systems cannot be switched If the safety operation mode is SAFETY MODE...

Страница 677: ...wing Page 330 DEVICES Classification Type Device name Symbol Number of points default Changeability with parameter settings Notation Safety user devices Bit Safety input SA X 8K points Selectable either 8K or 12K points Hexadecimal Bit Safety output SA Y 8K points Hexadecimal Bit Safety internal relay SA M 6K points Changeable Page 668 Safety device area setting range Decimal Bit Safety link relay...

Страница 678: ...for the SIL2 Process CPU turn off all safety internal relays Powering off and on Reset Safety link relay SA B This device is used as a device when sending and receiving safety data between SIL2 Process CPUs over CC Link IE Field Network Refreshing network modules using safety link relay Data is sent and received between SIL2 Process CPUs The safety communications send receive device range is set i...

Страница 679: ...esent is added to the current value when the OUT SA T instruction is executed If the safety timer coil is off at the execution of the OUT SA T instruction the current value is not updated The maximum response accuracy of the timer is the elapsed time since previous safety cycle processing was started until the present timer limit setting Ex Timer limit setting 10ms SA T0 setting value 8 Safety cyc...

Страница 680: ...ing the safety counter The safety counter current value is not cleared even when the counter coil input is turned off To clear reset the safety counter current value and turn off the contact issue the RST SA C instruction When the RST SA C instruction is executed the counter value is cleared and the contact is turned off Safety data register SA D This device can store numerical values Safety link ...

Страница 681: ...he safety system devices Safety special relay SA SM This relay stores the SIL2 Process CPU status relating to safety control Page 882 List of Safety Special Relay Areas Safety special register SA SD This register stores the SIL2 Process CPU status relating to safety control Page 885 List of Safety Special Register Areas ...

Страница 682: ...is calculated by the following calculation formula Set the number of safety local device points used so that the number is equal to or less than the capacity of the safety local device area Total number of safety local device points used A 16 B C 2 16 D A Number of points of the safety local device SA M B Number of points of the safety local devices SA D SA T current value SA ST current value and ...

Страница 683: ...can assign only standard safety shared labels A standard label cannot assign safety labels and standard safety shared labels as its original data location GX Works3 Operating Manual How to use standard safety shared labels A standard safety shared label is used to pass device data from a safety program to a standard program and vice versa When a standard safety shared label is used in a safety pro...

Страница 684: ... to the standard program via the standard safety shared label safe_state and the status is controlled with the annunciator No 5 If an error is detected with the annunciator the corresponding annunciator number is output to Y20 Standard program 0 4 8 When the safe state signal turns off the annunciator No 5 turns on The annunciator number detected by SM62 Annunciator is output to Y20 When the safe ...

Страница 685: ...pplicable The following table lists the availability of the classes of safety local labels Applicable Not applicable Class Availability Safety global label Standard safety shared label VAR_GLOBAL VAR_GLOBAL_CONSTANT VAR_GLOBAL_RETAIN Class Availability Safety program Safety function Safety function block VAR VAR_CONSTANT VAR_RETAIN VAR_INPUT VAR_OUTPUT VAR_OUTPUT_RETAIN VAR_IN_OUT VAR_PUBLIC VAR_P...

Страница 686: ...ucture definition 38 5 Constants The decimal constant K and hexadecimal constant H can be used in safety programs The specification method is the same as that for standard programs Example K1234 H1FFF Page 401 CONSTANTS Data type Availability Bit BOOL Word unsigned bit string 16 bits WORD Double word unsigned bit string 32 bits DWORD Word signed INT Double word signed DINT Single precision real nu...

Страница 687: ...n on after the system switching from the control system to the standby system and then to the control system again Note that the completion status of the completion device is not reflected to the tracking device When the system switching is performed during execution of an instruction execute the instruction again as required For some instructions an error will occur if an instruction is executed ...

Страница 688: ...m switching standby system to control system will turn on for one scan in the new control system and the REMFR instruction will be executed again on the station number 10 of the network number 1 Devices used 1 For details on the link special relay SB and link special register SW refer to the manuals for the network used 2 Change the device number according to the system Program example Device Desc...

Страница 689: ...ew control system to read the X signals and buffer memory status of the target module and to determine whether or not to execute the instruction again Devices used 1 For details on the link special relay SB and link special register SW refer to the manuals for the network used 2 Change the device number according to the system Program example Device Description SM1643 ON for only one scan after sy...

Страница 690: ...cution condition turned off before the system switching will be executed SCJ instruction When the signal flow memory is not tracked Once the system switching is performed the execution condition of the SCJ instruction turns on after the signal flow memory of the new control system turns off In the new control system processing jumps to the pointer specified by the SCJ instruction in the first scan...

Страница 691: ...xecuted with the status at the previous measurement XCALL instruction If the system switching is performed without the signal flow memory being tracked the signal flow memory of the new control system turns on Thus the subroutine program will not be executed when the execution condition of the XCALL instruction remains off in the first scan after system switching Rising instruction using SM1643 as...

Страница 692: ...nd standby system after system switching n Total number of loops Ex When the number of loops is eight the PIDINITP instruction needs 2 8 10 82 words and the PIDCONTP instruction needs 10 8 18 154 words Thus include D1000 to D1081 and D1100 to D1253 in tracking target data Classification Instruction symbol Program execution control instructions Disabling interrupt programs DI Enabling interrupt pro...

Страница 693: ...fer Thus even though output to the network module is changed by the COM or ZCOM instruction with the CPU module in the control system the change will not be reflected to the CPU module in the standby system After the system switching the CPU module in the new control system outputs old values to the network module and output from the network module may vary 2 This processing is not selectable beca...

Страница 694: ...Precautions for Using the Annunciator F This section describes the precautions for using the annunciator F When the SET F instruction is used to register the annunciator When the execution condition of the SET F instruction has been satisfied at system switching the annunciator that is turned on by the SET F instruction can be registered in the new control system The SET F instruction registers th...

Страница 695: ... into the state in which no timeout has occurred in the first scan after system switching When values are output writing values to the buffer memory and the output Y with a timer contact or an output variable the timer statues may go into the state in which no timeout has occurred as described above causing chattering of the output To transfer data with modules or external devices using the output...

Страница 696: ...tem switching For command output such as output Y startup by writing data to the buffer memory and clear to the intelligent function module and external devices consider the time taken for tracking the execution condition of command output from the CPU module in the control system to the CPU module in the standby system The following example shows a program that outputs data one scan later after t...

Страница 697: ...g on M0 turns on the output Y10 and turning on M10 turns off the output Y10 In the CPU parameter select Transfer default setting in Signal Flow Memory Tracking Setting of Redundant System Settings Page 629 Tracking transfer setting for the signal flow memory Without measures With measures 2 PLS M1 delays SET Y10 by one scan 9 PLS M11 delays RST Y10 by one scan External input X10 Output Y10 ...

Страница 698: ...tep 0 in the new control system after system switching Therefore values may be output twice before and after system switching Output results may differ between the two outputs Link direct device Jn Y Direct access output DY Refresh at execution of a specified program Refresh Group Setting of Program Setting Before outputting values with one of the above devices or setting check that the above oper...

Страница 699: ...system a continuation error occurs on the CPU module and the control system and the standby system continue operating without being switched Perform online module change if the redundant function module has failed MELSEC iQ R Online Module Change Manual 4 Since the CPU module and SIL2 function module are used as a pair replace them at the same time Since the standby system needs to be powered off ...

Страница 700: ...y system 6 Execute the memory copy from the control system to the standby system Execute the memory copy using the engineering tool Page 637 Memory Copy from Control System to Standby System When the memory copy is completed the MEMORY COPY LED of the redundant function module in the control system turns off and that in the standby system turns on 7 Restart the standby system Restart the standby s...

Страница 701: ...lace the redundant function module in the standby system 4 Power on the standby system Power on the standby system When the standby system is powered on the BACKUP LED of the redundant function module in the control system turns on 5 Check the modules for errors Check that no error has occurred on the CPU module or redundant function module in the standby system If the ERROR LED of either of the m...

Страница 702: ...dby system is powered off the BACKUP LED of the redundant function module in the control system flashes 3 Replace the main base unit in the standby system Replace the main base unit in the standby system with a new main base unit whose model is the same as that of the main base unit in the control system When mounting modules to the new base unit mount each module to the slots of the unit in the s...

Страница 703: ... are given in hexadecimal format 4 digits 16 bit unsigned integer The type of error includes the error which is detected through the self diagnostic function of each module and the common error which is detected during data communications between modules The following table lists the error detection type and the error code ranges Error detection type Range Description By the self diagnostic functi...

Страница 704: ...le information Information on the corresponding drive name and file name Parameter information Information on the parameter such as parameter storage location and parameter type System configuration information Information on the system configuration such as I O numbers and power supply numbers Safety station system configuration information Information on the own station or other stations at a sa...

Страница 705: ... using SM1679 Error reset the other system in programs or external devices Page 490 Clearing errors on the standby system CPU module from the control system CPU module Page 673 Clearing errors on the standby system CPU module from the control system CPU module List of error codes Codes of errors detected by the self diagnostic function 1000H to 3FFFH The following table lists error codes detected ...

Страница 706: ...isconnected The connector of the battery built in the CPU module is not securely connected Continue Replace the battery Connect the battery connector to use the file storage area in the device label memory or the latch function Check the connection status of the battery connector If it is loose securely connect the connector Always 1100H Memory card access error Data cannot be written to the memor...

Страница 707: ...or has occurred in the TCP IP communication The external device does not send an ACK response Continue Check the operation of the external device Check and correct the TCP ULP timeout value Since there may be congestion of packets on the line send data after a certain period of time Check if the Ethernet communication load is high because of the Ethernet functions being executed Use the Ethernet f...

Страница 708: ...ction to correct the error Always 1167H Unsend data send error Unsent data found but could not be sent Continue Check the settings for connection with the external device Check the operation of the external device or switching hub Since there may be congestion of packets on the line send data after a certain period of time Check if the Ethernet communication load is high because of the Ethernet fu...

Страница 709: ...ied for the output upper limit setting value Continue Check and correct the output upper limit setting value or output lower limit setting value Error location information At instruction execution 11AEH PID operation error A value smaller than 0 was specified for the input variation amount warning setting value or output variation amount warning setting value Continue Change the input variation am...

Страница 710: ...te error has been notified from the intelligent function module connected Stop continue Check the detailed information system configuration information of the error by executing module diagnostics using the engineering tool identify the error module and eliminate the error cause System configuration information Always 1210H An inter module synchronous signal error has been notified from the intell...

Страница 711: ... Always 1812H Module error Tracking communications could not be performed successfully due to an error in the redundant function module Continue The possible cause is malfunction due to noise Take measures to reduce noise by checking the distance of wires and cables and the grounding status of each device Execute a module communication test If the same error code is displayed again the possible ca...

Страница 712: ...ation has been received from a safety communication destination station Continue SIL2 Process CPU Check the detailed information safety station system configuration information of the error by executing module diagnostics using the engineering tool and check Station No Slot No another station and Base No another station If the destination station is an intelligent device station execute the system...

Страница 713: ...y in the CPU module or the module performing safety communications Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Safety CPU Check the detailed information system configuration information of the error by executing module diagnostics using the engineering tool and check the displayed station number Check the safety communication setting method and procedure referring to the manual of the safe...

Страница 714: ... the possible cause is a hardware failure of the data memory in the CPU module or the module performing safety communications Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Safety CPU Check the detailed information system configuration information of the error by executing module diagnostics using the engineering tool and check the displayed station number Then match the connected device and ...

Страница 715: ...dware failure of the data memory in the CPU module or the module performing safety communications Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Safety CPU Check the detailed information system configuration information of the error by executing module diagnostics using the engineering tool and check the displayed station number Then match the versions of the connected device and the device s...

Страница 716: ... CPU Check and correct the safety refresh monitoring time and the transmission interval monitoring time setting values The possible cause is malfunction due to noise or cable failure Check that there is no error in a transmission path by executing CC Link IE Field diagnostics Check the distance of wires and cables and the grounding status of each device as well Check the detailed information syste...

Страница 717: ...errupt occurrence 1A80H Timeout in safety communications Safety communications with a destination station could not be resumed within a safety I O hold time Continue Check and correct the safety I O hold time The possible cause is malfunction due to noise or cable failure Check that there is no error in a transmission path by executing CC Link IE Field diagnostics Check the distance of wires and c...

Страница 718: ...ways 1B43H Redundant system error The firmware version of the CPU module connected is not compatible with the other one The Process CPU and the SIL2 Process CPU are connected The error is detected in the control system or the standby system Continue Replace one CPU module with the one having a firmware version that can be used with the other CPU module together referring to the MELSEC iQ R Module ...

Страница 719: ...yed again the possible cause is a hardware failure of the redundant function module or tracking cable Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Always 1B78H Tracking communication error During tracking transfer a tracking communication error occurred The error is detected in the control system or the standby system Note that if the error is detected in the standby system the detailed inf...

Страница 720: ...ring tool eliminate the error cause and switch the systems from the engineering tool again If the same error code is displayed again the possible cause is a hardware failure of the CPU module base unit or tracking cable Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative System switching information At system switching execution 1BD1H System switching error The systems were not switched by using t...

Страница 721: ... module is mounted over or across the maximum number of I O points 4096 Stop Remove the module mounted over or across the maximum number of I O points 4096 Replace the module mounted on the last slot with the one that does not exceed the maximum number of I O points 4096 System configuration information At power on at RESET 2009H Module configuration error There is no response from the I O module ...

Страница 722: ...ent setting in the system parameters Correctly set the number of CPU modules including the empty setting in the system parameters in accordance with the number of CPU modules actually mounted Remove the I O module or intelligent function module mounted between the CPU modules System configuration information At power on at RESET 2043H CPU module configuration error The CPU module is mounted on the...

Страница 723: ... At power on at RESET 2070H Base unit configuration error An unsupported base unit is connected A GOT is bus connected to the Q series extension base unit Stop Disconnect the unsupported base unit If all the base units are supported the possible cause is a hardware failure of the CPU module or base unit Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Disconnect the GOT bus connected to the Q s...

Страница 724: ... extended SRAM cassette or battery less option cassette is inserted Stop Replace the extended SRAM cassette or battery less option cassette with the one supported by the CPU module Drive file information Always 2104H Memory error A battery less option cassette with the factory default settings or one that was used in another CPU module is inserted Stop Initialize the battery less option cassette T...

Страница 725: ...ishi representative Drive file information At power on at RESET at STOP RUN state 2181H Invalid file Since the firmware update or restoration after the firmware update of the CPU module has been performed the CPU module with a new firmware version no longer supports a program file in the CPU module Stop After reading program files from the programmable controller format the memory and write the pr...

Страница 726: ...tions 1 Format the corresponding drive Write the program s and FB program s to the CPU module again Then reset the CPU module and run it again 2 Correct the file names so that they do not overlap Drive file information At write at power on at RESET at STOP RUN state 2200H Parameter error The system parameter file and CPU parameter file do not exist The memory card parameter file or module extensio...

Страница 727: ...rd or module SIL2 function module safety function module I O module or intelligent function module connected Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Parameter information At power on at RESET at STOP RUN state 2223H Parameter error The parameter that needs a reset of the CPU module was modified and overwritten Stop Reset the CPU module and run it again Parameter information At write at...

Страница 728: ... parameter differs from that of the module actually mounted Stop Check if the system configuration displayed on the system monitor window of the engineering tool match the actual system configuration Check the detailed information parameter information of the error by executing module diagnostics using the engineering tool and correct the parameter setting corresponding to the displayed number If ...

Страница 729: ...t the parameter setting corresponding to the displayed number If the same error code is displayed again the possible cause is a hardware failure of the data memory in the CPU module or the intelligent function module connected Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Process CPU SIL2 Process CPU Correct the station number of the MELSECNET H network module Check the detailed information ...

Страница 730: ...en only to the host CPU module and the settings differ from those of other CPU modules Stop Check the detailed information parameter information of the error by executing module diagnostics using the engineering tool and correct the system parameter settings corresponding to the displayed number for the CPU No 2 and later The settings need to be the same among all the CPU modules The module synchr...

Страница 731: ...ase unit during operation Stop continue Check the detailed information system configuration information of the error by executing module diagnostics using the engineering tool and check the module corresponding to the displayed slot number Do not mount a CPU module I O module nor intelligent function module during operation Take measures to reduce noise Reset the CPU module and run it again If the...

Страница 732: ...and run it again If the same error code is displayed again the possible cause is a hardware failure of the host CPU module or another CPU module where the error has been detected Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative System configuration information At power on at RESET 2461H An error has been detected in another CPU module when the instruction was executed Stop continue Error locati...

Страница 733: ...oved during operation An error was detected on the system bus Stop CPU module Check the detailed information system configuration information of the error by executing module diagnostics using the engineering tool and check the module corresponding to the displayed slot number Check the connection status of the extension cable Take measures to reduce noise Reset the CPU module and run it again If ...

Страница 734: ...ent function module connected Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative System configuration information At module access 24C5H 24C6H System bus error An error was detected on the system bus Stop CPU module Take measures to reduce noise Reset the CPU module and run it again If the same error code is displayed again the possible cause is a hardware failure of the CPU module or extension c...

Страница 735: ... time of the fixed scan interrupt program exceeded the interrupt execution interval SIL2 function module safety function module The scan time exceeded the execution monitoring time set in parameter The initial 1st scan time exceeded the execution monitoring time set in the CPU parameters Stop CPU module Check the detailed information time information of the error by executing module diagnostics us...

Страница 736: ...le or base unit Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Always 2631H A multiple CPU synchronization error has been detected Stop System configuration information At power on at RESET at END instruction execution 2800H I O number or network number specification error The specified I O number is out of range other than 0 to FFH 3E0 to 3E3H Stop continue Check the detailed information err...

Страница 737: ...ion error CPU module The device or label area used in the instruction exceeded the specified range The file register file is not set or was accessed without setting it in the CPU parameters file setting Safety function module The device or label area used in the instruction exceeded the specified range Stop continue CPU module Check the detailed information error location information of the error ...

Страница 738: ...ck the specified file Error location information drive file information At instruction execution 3000H Boot function execution error The boot setting in the memory card parameters is incorrect Stop Check and correct the boot setting in the memory card parameters Drive file information At power on at RESET 3001H Boot function execution error When the boot function was executed the file format proce...

Страница 739: ...ory card The restoration target data setting value is out of range The restoration target date folder setting value or number folder setting value is out of range Stop Check and correct the restoration target date folder setting value or number folder setting value and execute the function again Check and correct the restoration target data setting value and execute the function again Turn off bit...

Страница 740: ...at STOP RUN state 3120H Program error The CPU module does not support the dedicated instruction executed Stop Check the detailed information error location information of the error by executing module diagnostics using the engineering tool display the error program step by clicking the Error Jump button and correct the program Replace the CPU module with the one that supports the instruction Error...

Страница 741: ...r by executing module diagnostics using the engineering tool display the error program step by clicking the Error Jump button and check the program Take measures to reduce noise Write the sequence program s and FB program s to the CPU module again Then reset the CPU module and run it again If the same error code is displayed again the possible cause is a hardware failure of the CPU module or modul...

Страница 742: ...duce noise Write the SFC program to the CPU module again Then reset the CPU module and run it again If the same error code is displayed again the possible cause is a hardware failure of the CPU module Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Error location information At SFC program execution 3193H A self step number was specified for the specification destination step number for the re...

Страница 743: ...ep by clicking the Error Jump button and correct the program Turn on SM321 Start stop SFC program if it is off Error location information At instruction execution 31B3H SFC program block step specification error The number of simultaneous active block steps that can be specified in the SFC program exceeds the permissible value Stop Check the detailed information error location information of the e...

Страница 744: ...ot using safety global labels or standard safety shared labels delete the safety global label setting file and standard safety shared label setting file SIL2 function module safety function module Batch write the CPU parameters safety CPU parameters safety program safety FB file safety global label setting file and standard safety shared label setting file If not using safety global labels or stan...

Страница 745: ...not selected initialize the memory where the global label assignment information file is stored and write the sequence program file s FB file s and global label setting file to the programmable controller Drive file information At power on at RESET at STOP RUN state 3206H Program execution error After the sequence program was modified only the modified sequence program file was written to the prog...

Страница 746: ... license authentication does not exist Stop Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Error location information At instruction execution 32FFH License authentication error The specified license key is incorrect Stop Check the license key and specify correct one Error location information At instruction execution 3300H Pointer setting error The total number of points of local or global p...

Страница 747: ...nostics using the engineering tool display the error program step by clicking the Error Jump button and correct the number of nesting levels 16 or less Error location information At instruction execution 3361H The number of nesting levels in the FOR instruction exceeded its limit 16 3362H The number of nesting levels in the DI instruction exceeded its limit 16 3363H Nesting depth error The number ...

Страница 748: ... information At instruction execution 33D0H Temporary area exceeded The secured temporary area size exceeded its limit Stop Check the detailed information error location information of the error by executing module diagnostics using the engineering tool display the error program step by clicking the Error Jump button and correct the number of nesting levels in the function Error location informati...

Страница 749: ...ing module diagnostics using the engineering tool display the error program step by clicking the Error Jump button and check the SFC program execution status Error location information At instruction execution 3425H Operation error The clock data specified with the DATEWR P instruction is less than 1 hour from the daylight saving time starting time Stop continue Check the detailed error informatio...

Страница 750: ...fore sending the next request Correct the timeout value Error location information At END instruction execution 3600H Safety system configuration error SIL2 Process CPU SIL2 function module The SIL2 function module controlled by the host CPU module is not mounted to the right of the CPU module The slot right of the CPU module is set as Empty in the system parameters I O Assignment Setting Safety C...

Страница 751: ...heck the detailed information system configuration information of the error by executing module diagnostics using the engineering tool and check the module corresponding to the displayed slot number If the module does not support the system using the SIL2 Process CPU remove the module from the base unit System configuration information At power on at RESET 3622H SIL2 system configuration error The...

Страница 752: ...dule cannot communicate parameters Stop Mount a SIL2 function module or a safety function module controlled by the host CPU module If the same error code is displayed again the possible cause is a hardware failure of the CPU module or module SIL2 function module or safety function module connected Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Parameter information At power on at RESET 3681H ...

Страница 753: ...et in the program settings Stop Correct the number of safety programs so that it is within the maximum number to be executed Parameter information At power on at RESET 36A1H Parameter error safety function A value exceeding the maximum number of safety FB files to be executed is set in the FB FUN file settings Stop Correct the number of safety FB files so that it is within the maximum number to be...

Страница 754: ...heck the detailed information drive file information of the error by executing module diagnostics using the engineering tool format the corresponding drive of the standby system CPU module write all files to the CPU module and restart the standby system CPU module Set the same number of steps as that of the control system CPU module in Allocate Memory for Online Program Change on the Program Detai...

Страница 755: ...cannot be used together are mounted The systems were started with the Process CPU and the SIL2 Process CPU Stop When using the CPU modules with firmware versions that cannot be used together replace either CPU module with the one that can be used together referring to the MELSEC iQ R Module Configuration Manual When using the Process CPU and the SIL2 Process CPU together replace either CPU module ...

Страница 756: ...ation system configuration information of the error by executing module diagnostics using the engineering tool and check the module corresponding to the displayed slot number If the module does not support the redundant system function remove the module from the base unit Check the firmware version of the corresponding module If the module does not support the redundant system function remove the ...

Страница 757: ...Mitsubishi representative Parameter information At power on at RESET 37A2H 37A3H Parameter error redundant function Total amount of data set for tracking transfer in the CPU parameters exceeds the maximum limit Stop Set the tracking capacity of each block within the allowable range in the CPU parameters Parameter information At power on at RESET 37A4H Parameter error redundant function In the CPU ...

Страница 758: ...o noise Take measures to reduce noise by checking the distance of wires and cables and the grounding status of each device Execute a module communication test If the same error code is displayed again the possible cause is a hardware failure of the redundant function module Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Failure information Always 3C01H 3C02H At power on at RESET at END instru...

Страница 759: ... module Reset the CPU module and run it again If the same error code is displayed again the possible cause is a hardware failure of the power supply module CPU module base unit or extension cable Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Failure information Always 3C13H Hardware failure A hardware failure has been detected Stop Take measures to reduce noise Check the mounting status of t...

Страница 760: ...ishi representative Redundant function module Execute a module communication test If the same error code is displayed again the possible cause is a hardware failure of the redundant function module Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Always 3C30H Memory error An error has been detected in the memory Stop Take measures to reduce noise Check the mounting status of the CPU module SIL2...

Страница 761: ...e failure of the CPU module or module SIL2 function module or safety function module connected Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Failure information At END instruction execution at power on at RESET 3E10H Circuit error An error has been detected in the CPU module SIL2 function module or safety function module Stop Take measures to reduce noise Check the mounting status of the CPU...

Страница 762: ...error code is displayed again the possible cause is a hardware failure of the CPU module or module SIL2 function module or safety function module connected Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Failure information At power on at RESET at interrupt occurrence 3E61H Always 3E68H Hardware failure A hardware failure has been detected Stop Take measures to reduce noise Check the mounting ...

Страница 763: ...el name selected in the engineering tool When using Ethernet communication shift the communication start timing 4008H Common error The CPU module is BUSY The buffer is not vacant Execute the request again after the specified period of time has elapsed 400BH Common error A set value of data handled according to a specified request is invalid Check the request data of a dedicated instruction Check t...

Страница 764: ...ice and do not turn on or off 4034H Device specification error The dedicated instruction cannot be executed since the completion device for the dedicated instruction does not turn on Since the completion device for the SREAD or SWRITE instruction does not turn on in the CPU module on the target station execute the instruction again after setting the operating status of the CPU module on the target...

Страница 765: ...n CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool is used Clear the satisfied trigger condition and execute the trigger logging again 4065H Online registration error The device assignment information differs from the parameter The cassette set in the cassette setting in the CPU parameter differs from the one actually inserted An unsupported extended SRAM cassette or battery less option cassette is inserted ...

Страница 766: ...the instruction The program differs from that stored in the CPU module When CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool is used The data logging specifying the step number that does not exist or is not specified as the start number of the instruction was started Check and correct the specified step number Read the program from the CPU module to match it with that of the engineering tool and then execute...

Страница 767: ...C program online Set the operating status of the CPU module to STOP and write the SFC program 40B4H SFC file related error An attempt was made to change or delete the active block Inactivate the target block 40B5H SFC file related error The number of SFC steps after the program change exceeded the maximum Reduce the number of SFC steps to be added and execute the online change again 40B6H SFC file...

Страница 768: ...wer on and reset of the global label setting file is not performed The request cannot be executed because the data in the global label setting file being processed and the specified consistency check data are not the same Perform the reflection operation STOP RUN or Power on and reset of the global label setting file Correct the details of the global label setting and write the file to the program...

Страница 769: ...gistration was cleared after the online program change was executed Execute the registration of monitoring condition again after the online program change 410CH Any other error Writing to the specified data is not supported Check that the version of the engineering tool used is correct Check the settings and make a correction 410EH Any other error When the execution status of the online program ch...

Страница 770: ...t of the existing file Execute again after checking the size of the specified file 413AH File related error The specified file has exceeded the already existing file size Execute again after checking the size of the specified file 413BH File related error The same file was simultaneously accessed from different engineering tools When CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool is used An operation was p...

Страница 771: ...ame is specified in a wrong method Execute again after checking the file name 41CCH File related error The specified file does not exist Or the specified subdirectory does not exist When CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool is used The data logging was started in a state that sub folders for storing data logging files or folders cannot be created or accessed Or sub folders cannot be created or ac...

Страница 772: ...failure backup data of the specified drive memory are corrupted Execute the operation again after checking that the SD memory card has been inserted 41F3H File related error The file size is larger than the following the value to be acquired when 2 bytes are subtracted from 4G bytes Specify a smaller value for the file size when creating a file or changing the file size Alternatively divide the fi...

Страница 773: ...dant system related error The request cannot be executed because the operating status of the CPU module in the control system differs from that of the CPU module in the standby system Match the operating status of the CPU module between the systems and execute the request again 4246H Redundant system related error The request cannot be executed because the operation mode is being changed or the sy...

Страница 774: ...e Change the operation mode using the same communication route of when the mode was changed from backup mode to separate mode 425AH Redundant system related error The system cannot be started as a control system because of either of the following reasons The system A B setting has not been determined The system is being changed to the control system Take the following actions Set one system as sys...

Страница 775: ...n When CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool is used The data logging was started in a state where the saved file number has reached its maximum FFFFFFFF Or the number reached to the maximum during the execution The saved file number in the storage target memory has reached its maximum FFFFFFFF Delete files or change the storage destination and then register When CPU Module Logging Configuration T...

Страница 776: ...ot begin during the execution of real time monitor Start real time monitor after the stop of the real time monitor being executed 4293H Debug related function error Execution fails because the internal buffer exceeds its maximum capacity Check and correct the settings of internal buffer capacity and then try again 4294H Debug related function error Execution fails because the settings of internal ...

Страница 777: ...r code is displayed again even after the redundant system is restarted the possible cause is a hardware failure of the CPU module redundant function module or tracking cable Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 42C2H Redundant system related error The memory copy function is executed to the CPU module that does not support the selection writing of program restoration information whi...

Страница 778: ...users exceeds the maximum value and therefore the system is unable to authenticate the applicable user Unnecessary logged on users should log off Adjust the number of log ons to within the maximum value 431DH Securityfunction error user authentication An operation that requires the authentication was performed with no user management information registered in the CPU module Register user managemen...

Страница 779: ...ds 4417H Securityfunction error An attempt was made to write or delete the security key with no extended SRAM cassette or battery less option cassette inserted in the CPU module Check that an extended SRAM cassette or battery less option cassette is correctly inserted and then perform the operation again 4418H Securityfunction error The security key cannot be changed or deleted because any locked ...

Страница 780: ...he setting of the automatic detection function of connected devices Select Read Model Name of Slave Station in the setting of the automatic detection function of connected devices and execute the function again 480CH iQ Sensor Solution related error The specified command cannot be executed because the automatic detection of connected device function of iQ Sensor Solution is being executed Execute ...

Страница 781: ...E module which is on the path that IP packets travel 4A01H Network error The network of the number set to the routing parameters does not exist The specified CPU module cannot be communicated through the network that is not supported by the CPU module Check and correct the routing parameters set to the related stations Set communication through the network that is supported by the specified CPU mo...

Страница 782: ...odule which is on the path that IP packets travel 4A28H IP communication test error In the system where the CPU module is connected to the request destination device over Ethernet the request path and the response path of IP packets differ When multiple CC Link IE modules with the same network number are connected in a multiple CPU system the CC Link IE module mounted on the lowest number slot is ...

Страница 783: ...e logging data Do not execute the online change function while the data logging function specifying the step number is being executed data logging status RUN waiting no collection Condition waiting no collection Start waiting no collection Pause Collecting Trigger waiting collecting before trigger Collecting after trigger or Saving the logging data Stop the data logging function specifying the ste...

Страница 784: ...e the data restoration function using another backup data 4C13H CPU module data backup restoration function error Reading writing of data from to the CPU built in memory completed with an error Back up data in the CPU built in memory initialize the memory and write the data back to the original memory Then execute the data backup restoration function The possible cause is a hardware failure of the...

Страница 785: ... is being executed Execute the command again after the data backup restoration processing ends 4C20H CPU module data backup restoration function error The data backup restoration function was executed while the CPU module was in a state where this function could not be executed Deselect the Access from External Device checkbox in the label setting window or delete labels with this item selected an...

Страница 786: ...nction error Reading from an access to a file is failed The specified file does not exist Or the specified subdirectory does not exist Check that the file is not deleted Check the file name and subdirectory name Then execute the function again C000H to CFBFH MELSEC iQ R Ethernet User s Manual Application CFC0H Cyclic transmission error master station Unable to execute cyclic transmission because m...

Страница 787: ...ce status of slave station in network Check the slave station which is disconnected Take measures to reduce noise CFE9H Cyclic transmission error slave station The slave station of the same IP address has existed in the same network address Check the slave station where the error occurred CFF0H Slave station error The error occurred in slave station Check the slave station where the error occurred...

Страница 788: ...correct the target base unit number and or slot number and turn on SM1600 Module selection request flag again 4214H The model of the newly mounted module differs from that of the module before online change Or the newly mounted module is not upward compatible module mismatch Mount the same model or the upward compatible module and execute the request again Mount a module of the same model and perf...

Страница 789: ...being changed online execute the request again after the completion of the change 6F29H Module communication test error A module communication test execution request was received in the state where tracking cables are connected incorrectly Connect one end of a tracking cable to the IN connector and the other end to the OUT connector of the test target redundant function module and execute the requ...

Страница 790: ...U module data backup restoration information Information on the CPU module data backup restoration function operation result error data specification initialization latest data special relay special register operation mode CPU module data backup setting information Information on the CPU module backup setting backup function setting error codes Data backup restoration information of iQ Sensor Solu...

Страница 791: ... the user authentication function File access control information Information on file access control access level Device label information Information on the corresponding device and label System configuration information Information on the system configuration Target folder information of the CPU module data backup restoration function Information on the data backup restoration target folder fold...

Страница 792: ...on function failed because there was no response from the SNTP server 00400 Power on reset The CPU module has been power on or reset Start up information 2 00401 Initial processing cancelled The CPU module has been powered off or reset during initial processing Information on the initial processing cancellation 00410 Boot operation Boot operation was performed 00411 SD memory card diagnostics comp...

Страница 793: ...not be checked within the period specified by the response monitoring timer 00907 Divided message receive timeout error All the data could not be received within the period specified by the response monitoring timer Data of the total data length could not be received The remaining part of the message divided into the TCP IP level could not be received within the period specified by the response mo...

Страница 794: ...ause of tracking communication stop 00C28 Retry A tracking communication retry was performed due to the change in communication route caused by loopback A tracking communication retry was performed due to a line status error such as faulty cable and incorrect connector connection 00F00 System switching by the system The systems were switched due to the cause on the redundant system side System swi...

Страница 795: ... IP filer setting was accepted Blocked IP address information 10400 File password registration change deletion A file password was successfully registered changed or deleted Operation source information File password information 10401 File password registration change deletion failed Registration change or deletion of a file password failed 10402 File password unlock A file password was successful...

Страница 796: ... all users log off processing of the user authentication function completed successfully Login logout information 10609 All users log off failed The all users log off processing of the user authentication function failed 10700 Access from unauthorized access level A file was accessed from an access level not allowed by the user authentication function file access control File access control inform...

Страница 797: ...a backup setting disabled Backup function cannot be set CPU module data backup setting information 20600 iQ Sensor Solution data backup succeeded Data in the target device supporting iQ Sensor Solution were successfully backed up Information on the execution status of the data backup restoration function of iQ Sensor Solution Target device information of the data backup restoration function of iQ ...

Страница 798: ...er was created A new file was created or data was written to a file Operation source information Drive file information 24201 File copy 1 A file was copied Copy source drive file information Copy destination drive file information 24202 Folder file rename 1 A folder name or file name was changed 24300 Safety operation mode change SAFETY MODE wait for restart The safety operation mode was changed t...

Страница 799: ...ialized Operation source information Drive file information 2A201 Device label zero clear Values in a device or label were cleared to zero Device label information 2A202 Folder file deletion 1 A folder or file was deleted Drive file information 2A205 Battery less option cassette initialization The battery less option cassette was initialized Drive number and file name 2B000 System switching by a u...

Страница 800: ...nt it back on the main base unit Check if the READY LED of another module is on A major error has occurred in the CPU module Replace the CPU module Check if the READY LED turns on when the power supply module is replaced and the power is restored to the system Check the LED status after the power supply module on the extension base unit is also replaced An error has occurred in the power supply mo...

Страница 801: ...ff check the following If the READY LED of the SIL2 function module still does not turn on even after the above actions are taken the possible cause is a hardware failure of the module Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Check item Action Check if the redundant function module has been properly mounted If not properly mount the module on the base unit Check item Action Check if an ...

Страница 802: ...local Mitsubishi representative When the specific extension base unit cannot be recognized For troubleshooting refer to the following MELSEC iQ R Module Configuration Manual When the specific Q series extension base unit cannot be recognized For troubleshooting refer to the following MELSEC iQ R Module Configuration Manual Check item Action Check if the safety function module has been properly mou...

Страница 803: ...he write protect for the SD memory card Check if the SD memory card is formatted while the SD memory card is being targeted for writing Carry out formatting for the SD memory card Check if the data to be written exceeds the capacity of CPU built in memory or SD memory card Check the CPU built in memory or SD memory card for their free space Check if a password has been set for the programmable con...

Страница 804: ...dress of the CPU module in Server Page 247 Data Source Name Setup Check if 61461 is set in Port Set 61461 in Port Page 247 Data Source Name Setup Check if the absolute path of the database of the CPU module set in Database is correct Set the correct absolute path of the database in Database Page 247 Data Source Name Setup Check item Action Check if invalid login password is displayed in the error ...

Страница 805: ... Initial Data is set when initial processing is performed e g powering on the system changing the operating status from STOP to RUN Status change Data is set when the status is changed Error Data is set when an error occurs Instruction execution Data is set when an instruction is executed Request Data is set when requested by a user using the special relay Writing Data is set when a user performs ...

Страница 806: ...Battery low This relay has the same function as SM51 except for switching to off after the battery voltage has been recovered to a normal value S Error ALL SM53 AC DC DOWN Off No AC DC DOWN detection On AC DC DOWN is detected This relay switches to on when a momentary power failure within 20ms is detected while the AC power supply module is in use This relay can be reset when power is turned off a...

Страница 807: ...urns on if causes to turn on any bits of SD151 have been occurred This relay turns off if causes to turn on any bits of SD151 have been removed In a multiple CPU system the flags are stored only to the CPU No 1 S Status change Rn 1 RnP RnPSF SM152 Momentary power failure detection power supply module 1 Off Not detected On Detected This relay turns on when a momentary power failure of the input pow...

Страница 808: ...ed S Request ALL SM213 Clock data read request Off Non processing On Reading request Clock data is loaded into SD210 to SD216 when this relay is in the ON state U ALL SM217 Daylight saving time status flag Off Not during daylight saving time On During daylight saving time Turns on if during daylight saving time with daylight saving time function Turns off if not during daylight saving time S Statu...

Страница 809: ... 4 CPU reset flag This relay switches to off when the CPU module of the CPU No 4 is not being reset This relay is on while the CPU module of the CPU No 4 is being reset including the case when the CPU module is removed from the base unit Errors occur in the other CPU modules S Status change ALL SM384 System operation setting request Off Request accepted On Request submitted This relay is turned fr...

Страница 810: ...tinuous transition when off Continuous transition when on There is no effect on operation for blocks for which the continuous transition bit has been set U Rn 1 RnP 1 SM324 Continuous transition prevention flag Off When transition executed On When there is no transition This relay switches to off during operation in modes with continuous transition or during continuous transition and switches to o...

Страница 811: ...ld reach the END step However coils are turned off following forced termination U Rn 1 RnP 1 SM328 Clear processing mode when the sequence reaches the end step Off Clear processing performed On Clear processing not performed Selects whether to perform clear processing if an active step other than those retained in the block exists when the END step is reached When this relay switches to off all ac...

Страница 812: ...0 2 second clock This relay repeats on off at certain intervals The initial state when CPU module is powered on or reset is off This relay switches to on or off after a specified time is elapsed even when the program execution is in progress S Status change ALL SM412 1 second clock This relay repeats on off at certain intervals The initial state when CPU module is powered on or reset is off This r...

Страница 813: ...ck No 4 ALL SM440 On only initial I44 execution after RUN This relay is on during the first execution of the inter module synchronous interrupt program I44 after RUN mode starts and off during the second execution onwards Note that the relay status while the DI instruction is executed is as follows On during the first execution of the inter module synchronous interrupt program I44 after the DI ins...

Страница 814: ...lue in SD414 is changed from 10 to 3 1 If the new interval in SD414 has already elapsed after the last change of the ON OFF state of SM414 the ON OFF state changes as soon as a value in SD414 is changed 2 Value change SM414 SD414 ON OFF 10 3 6s 10s 3s 3s 3s 1 2 ...

Страница 815: ...munication cycle or the program cannot be executed due to various reasons such as execution of a higher priority interrupt program and interrupt disabling by the instruction execution The ON state is maintained even after the program is later completed within the specified fixed scan communication cycle Clear by turning power off and on or resetting S Status change Rn 1 RnP RnSF SM484 Execution se...

Страница 816: ...witches to on when the SD memory card is disabled by switching SM606 to on This relay switches to off when the forcibly disabled SD memory card is enabled by switching SM606 to off S Status change ALL 2 SM624 Battery less option cassette insertion flag Off Not inserted On Inserted This relay is on when the battery less option cassette is inserted S Status change Rn 4 SM625 Battery less function ex...

Страница 817: ...lay switches to on when the write process to the system memory Flash ROM 1 is in progress and switches to off when the write process is complete S Writing RnPSF RnSF SM638 System memory rewrite count error flag Off The number of rewrite operations is less than 100000 On The number of rewrite operations reaches 100000 This relay switches to on when the number of system memory Flash ROM 1 rewrite op...

Страница 818: ...m is being executed U ALL SM702 Search method Off Sequential search On Dichotomizing search The search method in the search instruction can be specified by using this relay To use the dichotomizing search data must be sorted This relay saves returns while the interrupt program is being executed U ALL SM703 Sort order Off Ascending On Descending This relay can be used to specify how to arrange data...

Страница 819: ...ed U ALL SM772 CCD CRC instruction conversion mode 16 bit 8 bit selection Off 16 bit conversion mode On 8 bit conversion mode This relay can be used to select 16 bit conversion mode or 8 bit conversion mode with the CCD CRC instruction U Rn 2 SM773 SMOV instruction BCD conversion prohibit flag Off BCD conversion enabled On BCD conversion disabled This relay switches to on when disabling conversion...

Страница 820: ...execution During END Rn 2 RnP RnSF SM798 Number of used blocks information for the multiple CPU dedicated instruction for CPU No 3 Off The specified number of blocks is reserved On The number of blocks specified in SD798 is not reserved This relay switches to on when the number of remaining blocks in the dedicated instruction transfer area to be used in the multiple CPU dedicated instruction targe...

Страница 821: ...the start of the CPU module data backup S Status change Rn 1 SM959 CPU module data restoration error check flag Off No error On Error This relay turns on if an error occurs at the execution of restoration of the CPU module This relay turns off at the start of restoration of the CPU module S Status change Rn 1 SM960 Upper limit setting flag for the number of CPU module backup data Off Backup contin...

Страница 822: ...tart without collection waiting for RUN without collection mode However the relay switches to off when all the data logging stops S Status change Rn 1 RnP RnSF SM1203 Data logging file transfer stop request Off On Stop request exists On Off Transfer stopped This relay stops the data logging file transfer according to the value specified in SD1203 when this relay is changed from off to on This rela...

Страница 823: ...e Rn 1 RnP RnSF SM1217 Data logging setting No 1 Data logging data saving in progress Off Not in progress On In progress This relay turns on when data in the internal buffer is being saved in the SD memory card or function memory with the data logging S Status change Rn 1 RnP RnSF SM1218 Data logging setting No 1 Logging data storage file switching in progress Off Not in progress On In progress Th...

Страница 824: ...g No 1 Rn 1 RnP 2 RnSF 2 SM1290 to SM1299 Data logging setting No 9 Same configuration as the setting No 1 Data configuration is the same as the setting No 1 SM1210 to SM1219 Same configuration as the setting No 1 Rn 1 RnP 2 RnSF 2 SM1300 to SM1309 Data logging setting No 10 Same configuration as the setting No 1 Data configuration is the same as the setting No 1 SM1210 to SM1219 Same configuratio...

Страница 825: ...le S Status change Rn 1 No Name Data stored Details Set by setting timing CPU SM1360 Right to use request for iQ Sensor Solution data backup Off On Right to use requested On Off Right to use acquired released This relay requests acquiring or releasing the right to use of the data backup restoration of iQ Sensor Solution At the timing when this relay turns from off to on the relay requests the righ...

Страница 826: ...the restoration is requested S Status change Rn 1 SM1366 iQ Sensor Solution restoration error completion Off Other than error completion On Completed with an error This relay turns on when the iQ Sensor Solution data restoration is completed with an error The error code is stored into SD1376 or SD1377 When the iQ Sensor Solution data restoration is completed normally SM1365 turns on and this relay...

Страница 827: ...the data and save to the SD memory card are completed after the establishment of the trigger condition Thereafter the ON state remains even if memory dump is executed again If the trigger condition is established again On changes to Off S Status change Rn 1 No Name Data stored Details Set by setting timing CPU SM1497 Memory card free space flag for CPU module database Off 20MB or more free space O...

Страница 828: ...Error This relay is turned to on when write to the IP address storage area system memory 1 failed and off when it was successful S Status change ALL SM1522 IP address storage area clear request Off On Clear request exists On Off Storage area cleared When this relay is changed from off to on the IP address storage area system memory 1 is cleared Once clear of the IP address storage area system memo...

Страница 829: ... The relay turns off upon completion of the online module change processing S Status change RnP RnPSF SM1605 Module mounting completion flag Off Not completed On Completed This relay turns on when a new module has been mounted The relay turns off upon completion of the online module change processing S Status change RnP RnPSF SM1606 Module recognition request flag Off On Requested This relay is tu...

Страница 830: ... turns on when SM1600 is turned on to start the online module change processing The relay turns off upon completion of the online module change processing S Status change RnP RnPSF SM1618 Online module change error flag Off No error On Error This relay turns on when an error is detected This relay turns off when the error cause is eliminated and the online module change related request is executed...

Страница 831: ...aiting for the start up of the other system and when a system switching is completed The flag status does not change even if tracking cables are disconnected S Initial Status change RnP RnPSF SM1636 Previous control system identification flag When the previous control system is the system B this relay turns on during one scan in the system A following the RUN state after both systems were powered ...

Страница 832: ...is relay turns from on to off when the error reset has been completed Initial value is off U S Status change RnP RnPSF SM1680 Error of the other system monitoring Off No error On Error This relay turns on if an error occurs on communications with the other system when an initial processing including when the system is determined while waiting for the other system starts up or an END processing is ...

Страница 833: ...up of the other system after powered on This relay turns off under the following conditions Own system starts up as the control system or the standby system after succeeding in tracking communications with the other system Own system is started up as the control system by a certain operation while waiting for the start up of the other system S Status change RnP RnPSF No Name Data stored Details Se...

Страница 834: ...etting 3rd module Off Not set On Set This relay stores the CC Link IE Field Network safety communication setting status When safety communications are available the relay is on the start I O number of the target module is stored in SD1906 S Initial RnPSF RnSF SM1907 CC Link IE Field Network safety communication setting 4th module Off Not set On Set This relay stores the CC Link IE Field Network sa...

Страница 835: ...et when initial processing is performed e g powering on the system changing the operating status from STOP to RUN Status change Data is set when the status is changed Error Data is set when an error occurs Instruction execution Data is set when an instruction is executed Request Data is set when requested by a user using the special relay Switch change Data is set when the switch of the CPU module...

Страница 836: ... Tue 3 Wed 4 Thu 5 Fri 6 Sat ALL SD10 Self diagnostic error number Self diagnostic error number 1 The maximum of 16 types of error codes are stored into SD10 onwards when the diagnostics detects an error The same error code as one already stored in SD10 onwards is not stored The 17th error code onwards are not stored Also error codes are not stored when 16 types of error codes have already been st...

Страница 837: ...nnunciator F is turned on by the SET F instruction Number of the annunciator deactivated by the RST F instruction is removed from register areas SD64 to SD79 and the numbers of annunciators which were lined up behind the removed one move forward one by one When the number of detected annunciators has already reached 16 the number of a newly detected annunciator is not stored into SD64 to SD79 For ...

Страница 838: ...81 With or without specification b0 Drive number b1 File name SD82 Drive number SD83 to SD90 File name first eight characters of Unicode string S Error ALL SD81 to SD111 Detailed information 1 Detailed information 1 4 Parameter information SD81 With or without specification b0 Parameter type b1 Parameter storage location b2 I O number b3 Parameter number b4 Network number b5 Station number b6 Syst...

Страница 839: ...er of times information When there is no specification 0 is set to each SD SD81 With or without specification b0 Number of times set value b1 Number of times actual measurement value SD82 to SD83 Number of times set value SD82 Lower word of the number of times set value SD83 Upper word of the number of times set value SD84 to SD85 Number of times actual measurement value SD84 Lower word of the num...

Страница 840: ...e being executed 7 A failure of a network module detected on the standby system 8 System switching being executed 9 A redundant function module being changed online 10 System switching disabled on the standby system by using the DCONTSW instruction 14 Safety operation mode mismatch between both systems 15 A failure of safety tracking data detected SD85 Control system standby system transition 1 Co...

Страница 841: ...cation 0 Specification allowed 1 Specification not allowed SD83 to SD84 Date folder yyyymmdd Date of the folder is stored in BCD code yyyy 0 to 9999 mm 1 to 12 dd 1 to 31 FFFFFFFFH is stored when a folder cannot be specified SD83 Lower word of the date folder yyyymmdd SD84 Upper word of the date folder yyyymmdd SD85 Number folder 0 to 32767 FFFFH is stored when a folder cannot be specified S Error...

Страница 842: ...PU number 1 to 4 CPU 1 to 4 SD85 Network number SD86 Station number 0 to 120 0 is stored for the master station SD87 Connection number 0 to 120 SD88 Another station base number Slot number on another station base unit b0 to b7 Slot number on the base unit 0 to 11 b8 to b15 Base number 0 Main base unit 1 to 7 Extension base unit level 1 to level 7 8 Higher than level 7 S Error ALL SD112 Detailed in...

Страница 843: ... number and file name SD113 With or without specification b0 Drive number b1 File name SD114 Drive number SD115 to SD122 File name first eight characters of Unicode string 3 Annunciator number SD113 With or without specification b0 Annunciator number SD114 Annunciator number 4 Parameter information SD113 With or without specification b0 Parameter type b1 Parameter storage location b2 I O number b3...

Страница 844: ... number 0 to 120 0 is stored for the master station SD119 to SD129 System information 5 System configuration information SD113 With or without specification b0 I O number b1 Slot number b2 Base number b3 Power supply number b4 CPU number b5 Network number b6 Station number SD114 I O number SD115 b0 to b7 Slot number 0 to 11 b8 to b15 Base number 0 Main base unit 1 to 7 Extension base unit level 1 ...

Страница 845: ... Gain Kp operation 17 PID operation 18 Deviation check 19 PID operation 1 operation processing of Bn or Cn 20 PID operation 2 operation processing of Dn 21 PID operation 3 operation processing of MV 22 PIDP operation 23 Operating time monitor 24 SPI operation 25 IPD operation 26 BPI operation 27 Engineering value transformation 28 Variation rate limiter 29 Ratio calculation 30 Upper lower limit ch...

Страница 846: ...ary power failure is detected or an empty slot for the power supply module exists is stored using the following bit pattern In a multiple CPU system the status is stored only to the CPU module No 1 1 Powered off power supply voltage dropped power supply module 1 b0 Main base unit b1 to b7 1st to 7th level of the extension base unit 2 Powered off power supply voltage dropped power supply module 2 b...

Страница 847: ...e CPU system the status is stored only to the CPU module No 1 S Status change Rn 1 RnP RnPSF SD153 Momentary power failure detection count power supply module 2 Momentary power failure detection count for power supply module 2 S Status change Rn 1 RnP RnPSF SD154 Details of the invalid power supply module Details of the invalid power supply module bit pattern 0 Valid power off no power supply modu...

Страница 848: ...t for restart S Status change RnPSF RnSF SD206 Pair version Pair version The pair version of the SIL2 Process CPU or Safety CPU is stored in decimal notation S Initial RnPSF RnSF SD210 Clock data Clock data year The year value four digits of the clock data is stored as a BIN code S U Request ALL SD211 Clock data month The month value of the clock data is stored as a BIN code S U Request ALL SD212 ...

Страница 849: ...se unit only 1 to 7 number of extension base units The maximum number of implemented extension base units is stored S Initial Rn RnP RnSF SD242 Identification for whether or not Q series module can be mounted Identification of the base type 0 Cannot be mounted There is no base unit on which the Q series module can be mounted 1 Can be mounted There is a base unit on which the Q series module can be...

Страница 850: ... of points assigned to the SW device is stored in 32 bits The number of points is stored even when the number of points assigned to SW is 32K or less S Initial ALL SD285 SW H ALL SD288 Number of points assigned to timer counter devices T L The number of points assigned to the T device is stored in 32 bits The number of points is stored even when the number of points assigned to T is 32K or less S ...

Страница 851: ...84 System operation setting LED control setting for program restoration information write status Target file setting for the file batch online change Either of the following two setting can be used This setting is written to the setting storage area system area by turning off and on SM384 LED control setting for program restoration information write status Set either of the following to specify wh...

Страница 852: ... inter module synchronization cycle program I44 0 No cycle overrun event 1 to 65535 Accumulated number of cycle overrun events The number of events in which the inter module synchronous interrupt program I44 has not been completed within the inter module synchronization cycle or the program cannot be executed due to various reasons such as execution of a higher priority interrupt program and inter...

Страница 853: ...reas are cleared to 0 at the system switching S Every END ALL SD523 Minimum scan time unit s ALL SD524 Maximum scan time Maximum scan time unit ms The maximum value of the scan time other than one for the initial execution program is stored into SD524 and SD525 it is measured in increments of s SD524 stores a value in the ms place storage range 0 to 65535 SD525 stores a value in the s place storag...

Страница 854: ... is stored into SD530 and SD531 it is measured in increments of s SD530 stores a value in the ms place storage range 0 to 65535 SD531 stores a value in the s place storage range 0 to 999 These areas are cleared to 0 when the operating status of the CPU module is switched from STOP to RUN In a redundant system when the operating status of the CPU module is RUN state these areas are cleared to 0 at ...

Страница 855: ...it K bytes The amount of free space of the SD memory card is stored in increments of 1K byte S at change ALL 4 SD614 Device label memory drive 3 usage status Device label memory drive 3 usage status Usage status of the device label memory is stored using the following bit pattern On indicates being used b0 File register b1 to b15 Not used S Status change ALL SD616 Device label memory drive 3 capac...

Страница 856: ...0 It is set to 0 at the time when the write command is issued 2 S Writing ALL SD634 Index for the number of data memory write operations Index of the number of write operations up to now This register indicates the index value for the number of write operations to the data memory up to now stored as a 32 bit BIN value However the number of write operations is not equal to the index value When the ...

Страница 857: ...setting of the CPU parameters S Status change Rn SD648 Function memory capacity Function memory capacity Low order in K bytes The capacity of the function memory is stored in K bytes S Initial Rn 6 SD649 Function memory capacity High order in K bytes The capacity of the function memory is stored in K bytes S Initial Rn 6 SD650 Function memory free space capacity Function memory free space capacity...

Страница 858: ...n the DBIMPORT P instruction is executed the row number of the Unicode text file is stored The value is stored when the error completion signal of the DBIMPORT P instruction is turned on and is cleared to 0 when the DBIMPORT P instruction is executed S Status change Rn SD761 Row number of the Unicode text file upper S Status change Rn SD771 Specification of the number of write instruction executio...

Страница 859: ... instruction is specified for CPU No 2 When executing the multiple CPU dedicated instruction on CPU No 2 if the number of free blocks in the dedicated instruction transfer area is less than the setting value on this register SM797 is turned on This value is used as interlock signal for the continuous executions of the multiple CPU dedicated instruction U Rn 2 RnP RnSF SD798 Maximum number of block...

Страница 860: ...time day The day value of the date time when the firmware update was executed is stored as a BIN code S Initial Rn 1 SD915 Execution time hour The hour value of the date time when the firmware update was executed is stored as a BIN code S Initial Rn 1 SD916 Execution time minute The minute value of the date time when the firmware update was executed is stored as a BIN code S Initial Rn 1 SD917 Exe...

Страница 861: ... a BIN code S Initial Rn 1 SD928 Execution time second The second value of the date time when the firmware update was executed is stored as a BIN code S Initial Rn 1 SD929 Execution time day of the week The day of the week value of the date time when the firmware update was executed is stored as a BIN code 0 Sun 1 Mon 2 Tue 3 Wed 4 Thu 5 Fri 6 Sat S Initial Rn 1 SD930 Version after the update CPU ...

Страница 862: ...and time setting for automatic backup day Store the day when the automatic backup on the specified day and time is executed using the BIN code Day 1 to 31 U Rn 1 SD948 Day and time setting for automatic backup hour Store the hour when the automatic backup on the specified day and time is executed using the BIN code Hour 0 to 23 U Rn 1 SD949 Day and time setting for automatic backup minute Store th...

Страница 863: ...ation 1 to 32767 Serial number of the backup folder in a date folder 00001 to 32767 U Rn 1 SD959 Restoration error cause The cause of an error that occurred during the CPU module data restoration is stored 0H No error Other than 0 For details on the values stored when an error occurs refer to the list of error codes Page 703 List of error codes 0 is set at the start of the CPU module data backup S...

Страница 864: ...guration Tool S Status change Rn 1 RnP RnSF SD1213 Rn 1 RnP RnSF SD1214 Data logging setting No 1 Internal buffer free space Free space size of the internal buffer K bytes The amount of free space of the internal buffer is stored in K bytes The smaller the value the higher the generating ratio of processing overflow For the trigger logging it refers to the total capacity of internal buffer until t...

Страница 865: ... configuration as the setting No 1 Data configuration is the same as the setting No 1 SD1210 to SD1217 Same configuration as the setting No 1 Rn 1 RnP 2 RnSF 2 SD1250 to SD1257 Data logging setting No 5 Same configuration as the setting No 1 Data configuration is the same as the setting No 1 SD1210 to SD1217 Same configuration as the setting No 1 Rn 1 RnP 2 RnSF 2 SD1260 to SD1267 Data logging set...

Страница 866: ...le backup data Setting of the upper limit value for the number of CPU module backup data Set the upper limit value for the number of the backup data for the CPU module data backup 1 to 100 U Rn 2 No Name Data stored Details Set by setting timing CPU SD1360 Right to use request number for iQ Sensor Solution data backup restoration Right to use request number for data backup restoration Set the requ...

Страница 867: ...equested S Status change Rn 3 SD1372 Execution status of iQ Sensor Solution data backup restoration normal completion count Execution status of data backup restoration normal completion count This register indicates the execution status the number of devices where the processing has been completed normally of the iQ Sensor Solution data backup restoration Among the devices where the operation has ...

Страница 868: ...errors are detected in multiple devices the information of a device where the error detected first is stored Lower 8 bits target module 1H AnyWireASLINK 2H CC Link 3H Ethernet 4H CC Link IE Field Network Upper 8 bits execution unit AnyWireASLINK 1H In module units 2H In ID units CC Link and CC Link IE Field Network 1H In module units 2H In station units 3H In station sub ID units Ethernet 1H In mo...

Страница 869: ...192 168 3 40 3 3H and 40 28H Therefore the value of lower 16 bits 0328H is 808 This register is cleared to 0 when the right to use is acquired or the backup restoration is requested S Status change Error Rn 3 SD1382 Details on iQ Sensor Solution data backup restoration error device 2 Information of the device device 2 where an error has occurred This register stores the information of a device dev...

Страница 870: ...inter mask pattern Mask pattern The mask pattern for interrupt pointers is stored as shown in the following figure S at execution ALL No Name Data stored Details Set by setting timing CPU SD1468 Number of login users Number of login users The number of users logged in to the CPU module is stored The value is incremented by one every time the login operation to the programmable controller or files ...

Страница 871: ...tails on the values stored when an error occurs refer to the list of error codes Page 703 List of error codes S upon error Rn 1 No Name Data stored Details Set by setting timing CPU SD1484 Real time monitor internal buffer free space Free space size of the internal buffer K bytes The amount of free space of the internal buffer is stored in K bytes The smaller the value the higher the generating ra...

Страница 872: ...SD1498 Start up status of CPU module database Start up status of CPU module database When the CPU module database access function is enabled with the module parameter the CPU module database start up status is stored 0 No error FFFFH Starting up Other than above Start up error For the stored value at the start up error refer to the list of error codes that occur when a database access instruction ...

Страница 873: ...quest status is stored Open processing statuses of connection No 1 to 16 are stored 0 No open request 1 Open request exists b0 Connection 1 b1 Connection 2 b2 to b15 Connection 3 to 16 For details on the on off timing refer to the following MELSEC iQ R Ethernet User s Manual Application S Status change ALL SD1506 Socket communications receive status signal In this register receive status is stored...

Страница 874: ...etting range 00000001H to DFFFFFFEH 0 0 0 1 to 223 255 255 254 00000000H no setting Upon completion of writing or clearing the IP address to from the IP address storage area system memory 1 the value of default router IP address stored in the IP address storage area system memory 1 is stored 1 to 4 First to fourth byte S Status change U ALL SD1525 Default Router IP Address upper ALL SD1526 IP addr...

Страница 875: ...egister as an interlock for cyclic transmission For details on the interlock program refer to the following CC Link IE Field Network Basic Reference Manual S Status change Rn 2 SD1540 to SD1543 Data link status of each station Data link status of each station The data link status of each station is stored using the following bit pattern Off Normally operating station 1 On Faulty station The number...

Страница 876: ...ified Default The stored value returns to its default FFFFH upon completion of the online module change processing S Status change RnP RnPSF SD1617 Online module change progress status Online module change progress status The online module change progress status is stored 0 Normal operation 1 Module being selected 2 Module selected 3 Module removal requested 4 Module removal ready 5 Module removed...

Страница 877: ...tiple causes occurred at the same time bits corresponding to each cause turn on simultaneously If the tracking communications are disabled or the redundant function module is being changed online the other causes turn off When the redundant function module in the other system is being changed online Tracking communications disabled is stored in own system Even if a cause of the system switching fa...

Страница 878: ...ng request status from a network module of the other system System switching request status from a network module of the other system The system switching request status from a network module of the other system is stored using the following bit pattern The bits of the positions where no modules are mounted turn off b0 to b11 Slot No 0 to slot No 11 The system turns off the bit after the error in ...

Страница 879: ... status This register stores the execution status of the memory copy When the value other than 0 is stored the memory copy is completed with an error or cannot be executed 0H Completed normally Other than 0H Completed with an error or cannot be executed For details on the values stored when an error occurs refer to the error codes Page 703 List of error codes S Status change RnP RnPSF SD1662 Track...

Страница 880: ...688 Latest self diagnostic error time the other system Latest self diagnostic error time the other system This register stores the error time in the other system Data configuration is the same as SD1 to SD7 The values in SD1 to SD7 of the CPU module in the other system are reflected S Every END RnP RnPSF SD1689 Detailed information 1 information category the other system Information category code ...

Страница 881: ...tem starts up or an END processing is performed 0H Normal 12H Cable disconnection of the OUT side 13H Cable insertion error of the OUT side 14H Communications on the OUT side being established 21H Cable disconnection of the IN side 22H Cable disconnection of the IN or OUT side 23H Cable disconnection of the IN side or cable insertion error of the OUT side 24H Cable disconnection of the IN side or ...

Страница 882: ...SF RnSF SD1848 SA M L The number of points assigned to the SA M device is stored in 32 bits S Initial RnPSF RnSF SD1849 SA M H RnPSF RnSF SD1850 SA B L The number of points assigned to the SA B device is stored in 32 bits S Initial RnPSF RnSF SD1851 SA B H RnPSF RnSF SD1864 Number of points assigned to safety word devices SA D L The number of points assigned to the SA D device is stored in 32 bits...

Страница 883: ...y 16 is stored When the safety communication function is not used FFFFH is stored S Initial RnPSF RnSF SD1906 Start I O number of the CC Link IE Field Network safety communication target station 3rd module 0 to FFH Start I O number FFFFH Not set The value obtained by dividing the start I O number of the station targeted for CC Link IE Field Network safety communications by 16 is stored When the sa...

Страница 884: ... User and system Set timing Every END Data is set every time END processing is performed Initial Data is set when initial processing is performed e g powering on the system changing the operating status from STOP to RUN Status change Data is set when the status is changed Error Data is set when an error occurs Instruction execution Data is set when an instruction is executed Request Data is set wh...

Страница 885: ...sh communication status of each module 3rd module Off Normal On Communication error The safety refresh communication status of the 3rd CC Link IE Field Network module the one whose start I O number is stored in SD1906 is stored The safety refresh communication status of each safety connection is stored in SA SD1024 to SA SD1031 S Status change RnPSF RnSF SA SM1032 Safety refresh communication stat...

Страница 886: ...ation status of each safety connection is stored in SA SD1064 to SA SD1071 S Status change RnPSF RnSF SA SM1088 CC Link IE Field safety communications information storage area module specification switch request Off Module specification completed On Module specification requested The SA SD1088 content is updated when this relay changes from off to on This relay turns off when SA SD1090 to 1097 and...

Страница 887: ...Set timing Every END Data is set every time END processing is performed Initial Data is set when initial processing is performed e g powering on the system changing the operating status from STOP to RUN Status change Data is set when the status is changed Error Data is set when an error occurs Instruction execution Data is set when an instruction is executed Request Data is set when requested by a...

Страница 888: ...e as that of the 1st module Note that the SA SD numbers differ S Status change RnPSF RnSF SA SD1024 to SA SD1031 Safety refresh status of each safety connection 3rd module 0 Safety communications normal safety connection not used own station 1 Communication error The communication status of safety stations connected to the 3rd CC Link IE Field Network module the one whose start I O number is store...

Страница 889: ...sh communication status of each safety connection 8th module 0 Safety communications normal safety connection not used own station 1 Communication error The communication status of safety stations connected to the 8th CC Link IE Field Network module the one whose start I O number is stored in SD1911 is stored A communication error means that the safety station is not in any of the communication st...

Страница 890: ...cked After safety communication error is detected and the safety connection is interlocked the bit corresponding to the safety connection turns on The bit arrangement of the safety connection number is the same as that of the 1st module Note that the SA SD numbers differ S Status change RnPSF RnSF SA SD1272 to SA SD1279 Interlock release request for each safety connection 3rd module 0 Do not relea...

Страница 891: ...erlocked the bit corresponding to the safety connection turns on The bit arrangement of the safety connection number is the same as that of the 1st module Note that the SA SD numbers differ S Status change RnPSF RnSF SA SD1352 to SA SD1359 Interlock release request for each safety connection 8th module 0 Do not release the interlock 1 Release the interlock Turn off and on the bit corresponding to ...

Страница 892: ...Field Network module the one whose start I O number is stored in SD1909 is stored The bit arrangement of the safety connection number is the same as that of the 1st module Note that the SA SD numbers differ S Status change RnPSF SA SD1648 to SA SD1655 Safety I O hold status of each safety connection 7th module 0 Not holding safety input output 1 Holding safety input output The safety input output ...

Страница 893: ...em information Page 833 List of Special Register Areas Address Name Data stored Un G1024 Total number of connected stations The total number of connected stations set in parameter is stored Un G1025 Reserved station specification status The reserved station specification status of the slave station specified in parameter is stored Un G1026 to Un G1029 Reserved station specification status of each ...

Страница 894: ...e execution cycle error count The detected number of times that cycles for which safety cycle processing was not executed is stored Un G60 Pair version The pair version is stored in decimal notation Un G62 Current safety cycle time ms unit The current safety cycle processing time is stored The time is measured in 1 s units Un G62 The ms part is stored Range 0 to 65535 Un G63 The s part is stored R...

Страница 895: ...dule must be replaced Un G155 Data memory writing b0 This relay switches to on when a write error is detected during write operation to the data memory This relay switches to off when the write instruction is issued b1 This relay is on when the write process to the data memory is in progress The relay is switched to off when the write process is completed b2 This relay switches to on when the numb...

Страница 896: ...ngineering tool GOT or other testing operations from external device U S User and system Set timing Every END Data is set every time END processing is performed Initial Data is set when initial processing is performed e g powering on the system changing the operating status from STOP to RUN Status change Data is set when the status is changed Error Data is set when an error occurs Instruction exec...

Страница 897: ...atus change Un G1034 Group No 2 maximum link scan The maximum link scan time value during cyclic transmission is stored Unit ms S Status change Un G1035 Group No 2 minimum link scan The minimum link scan time value during cyclic transmission is stored Unit ms S Status change Un G1036 Group No 2 current link scan The current link scan time value during cyclic transmission is stored Unit ms S Status...

Страница 898: ...the occupied stations and the cyclic transmission is performed for the slave station 1 is stored in b0 to b7 and b8 to b15 If the specified slave station is a reserved station 0 is stored in b8 to b15 If the station number of the slave station that is specified in Diagnostic request information Un G1051 is other than the start station number of the occupied stations or the cyclic transmission is n...

Страница 899: ... specified in Diagnostic request information Un G1051 is stored 0 No timeouts 1 to 65535 Number of timeouts accumulated number 2 Un G1064 Accumulated number of disconnection detection After the END instruction of the scan where the bit 0 of Diagnostic information display request Un G1050 is turned off and on is executed the accumulated number of disconnections that detected in a slave station spec...

Страница 900: ...rol Function Blocks Instructions Program execution time The program execution time is the processing time when multiple programs are executed When the interrupt program is executed the overhead time during the interrupt program being executed is also included Processing time when multiple programs are executed program switching time When multiple programs are executed the scan time becomes longer ...

Страница 901: ...eed internal timer interrupt 1 I49 Saves stores the file register R block number 25 8 s Not save store the file register R block number 18 1 s Interrupt from module I0 to I15 I50 to I1023 Saves stores the file register R block number 19 1 s Not save store the file register R block number 12 8 s Interrupt factor Condition Overhead time Internal timer interrupt I28 to I31 Saves stores the file regis...

Страница 902: ...describes the processing time of safety communications Input processing time of safety communications Input processing time of safety communications s Number of connections set in the safety communication setting KM1 Number of mountable CC Link IE Field Network modules set for safety communications KM2 KM3 Output processing time of safety communications Output processing time of safety communicati...

Страница 903: ...me of END processing when executing each function Device label access service processing time Safety data identify check processing time Tracking transfer time Page 926 Increase in the scan time due to tracking transfer Common processing time The following table lists the common processing time of each CPU module to be treated by the system Condition Common processing time Programmable controller ...

Страница 904: ...hat is obtained through dividing the number of input points by 16 2 The value indicates the numeric value that is obtained through dividing the number of output points by 16 3 When the number of I O points is 0 this value is handled as 0 Condition Constant value MELSEC iQ R series module Main base unit Input KM1 0 04 KM2 0 56 KM3 11 2 Output KM4 0 02 KM5 0 94 KM6 6 30 Extension base unit Input KM1...

Страница 905: ...er of points of link output LY that is refreshed by the station 1 SB Number of points of link special relay SB 2 SW Number of points of link special register SW 2 SBU Number of points of link special relay SB 3 SWU Number of points of link special register SW 3 1 Total number of points here indicates the one of link devices that have been set in Refresh Setting and Network Configuration Settings N...

Страница 906: ...ster station local station 1 SB Number of points of link special relay SB 2 SW Number of points of link special register SW 2 SBU Number of points of link special relay SB 3 SWU Number of points of link special register SW 3 1 Total number of points here indicates the one of link devices that have been set in Refresh Setting and Network Configuration Settings Note that the number of points that ha...

Страница 907: ...of points here indicates the one of when module label is used Calculation is executed while it is regarded as 0 when module label is not used 4 The base units here indicates the type of base unit where the network module targeted for refresh is mounted Link refresh processing time for the MELSECNET H module The link refresh processing time between the MELSECNET H module and the modules mounted on ...

Страница 908: ...ed by the master station 2 RY Total number of points of remote output RY refreshed by the master station 2 RWw Total number of points of remote register RWw refreshed by the master station 2 RWr Total number of points of remote register RWr refreshed by the master station 2 1 This is added when file register R ZR is used 2 This value is determined according to the number of slave stations to be co...

Страница 909: ...ber of blocks for refresh settings can be checked in Auto Refresh Setting Total Counts of Module Parameter List window For details refer to the manual for the module used Condition Constant value MELSEC iQ R series module KM1 Module on the main base unit CPU module 0 98 Module on the extension base unit CPU module 0 98 KM2 Module on the main base unit CPU module 11 6 Module on the extension base u...

Страница 910: ...mber of other CPU modules KM5 Number of points of receive word Refresh when END The following table lists the constant values when refresh is executed in END processing at CPU buffer memory area Refresh when I45 is executed The following table lists the constant values when refresh is executed in Multiple CPU synchronous interrupt I45 at fixed scan communication area Constant Constant value KM1 6 ...

Страница 911: ... becomes longer The increase in scan time can be calculated by the following formula Increase in scan time s KM1 KM2 Number of data logging settings KM3 Number of device points of internal device 1 1 This indicates the total number of points of data logging setting No 1 to No 10 Data logging file transfer function In the data logging file transfer function the scan time does not increase Processin...

Страница 912: ...oints of word device KM3 Number of points of bit device In monitoring global devices X Y M L B F SB V T ST C LT LST LC D W SW FX FY SM FD SD BLn S global labels In monitoring file registers R ZR In monitoring module access devices Un G U3En G U3En HG link direct devices Jn W Jn X Jn SW Jn Y Jn SB Jn B In monitoring local devices M V T ST C LT LST LC D local labels Constant Setting of the internal ...

Страница 913: ...ich are performed the file batch online change 4 The number of the program files which are performed the file batch online change 5 The total number of steps for the program files which are performed the file batch online change The number of steps for each program file can be checked Confirm Memory Size Offline in Tool of the engineering tool Simple CPU communication function The processing time ...

Страница 914: ...y cycle time 10ms Perform safety communications for 3 connections Scan time 1 5ms when safety data identify check not executed Condition Device label access service processing time Connected via USB Ladder block change during RUN online program change 100 steps are inserted into the head of program of 40K steps 1 0ms maximum 1 Monitor data registration Data register D Number of device points 32 po...

Страница 915: ...ccess to files in the SD memory card except for the data logging function are not active The default setting value is used for the file transfer server setting of the CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool however the IP address login user name and password can be customized Parameters are used only for required settings that can be connected to the FTP server IP address settings of the module para...

Страница 916: ...ion 4 0ms 8 0ms File deletion specification at transfer completion 4 0ms 4 0ms 8 0ms 1280 points 128 points 10 setting Not performed 18 0ms 24 0ms 20 0ms 26 0ms Performed No file deletion specification at transfer completion 19 0ms 23 0ms File deletion specification at transfer completion 19 0ms 24 0ms For the R04 EN CPU 23 0ms Number of points File transfer Collection interval at which data can b...

Страница 917: ...sed only for required settings that can be connected to the FTP server IP address settings of the module parameter only and default setting values are used for other settings Number of points File transfer Collection interval at which data can be collected When the function memory is used When the SD memory card is used NZ1MEM 2GBSD NZ1MEM 4 8 16GBSD 8 points 8 points 1 setting Not performed 1 0ms...

Страница 918: ...file deletion specification at transfer completion 30 0ms 35 0ms File deletion specification at transfer completion 1 0ms 30 0ms 35 0ms Number of points File transfer Collection interval at which data can be collected When the function memory is used When the SD memory card is used NZ1MEM 2GBSD NZ1MEM 4 8 16GBSD ...

Страница 919: ...le Logging Configuration Tool however the IP address login user name and password can be customized Parameters are used only for required settings that can be connected to the FTP server IP address settings of the module parameter only and default setting values are used for other settings 1 3ms to 4 5ms for the Process CPU redundant mode Number of points File transfer Collection interval at which...

Страница 920: ...ms File deletion specification at transfer completion 3 0ms 4 0ms 7 0ms For the R04 EN CPU 6 0ms 1280 points 128 points 10 setting Not performed 13 0ms 24 0ms 18 0ms 26 0ms Performed No file deletion specification at transfer completion 17 0ms 20 0ms For the R04 EN CPU 18 0ms File deletion specification at transfer completion 17 0ms 21 0ms For the R04 EN CPU 18 0ms Number of points File transfer C...

Страница 921: ...sed only for required settings that can be connected to the FTP server IP address settings of the module parameter only and default setting values are used for other settings Number of points File transfer Collection interval at which data can be collected When the function memory is used When the SD memory card is used NZ1MEM 2GBSD NZ1MEM 4 8 16GBSD 8 points 8 points 1 setting Not performed 1 0ms...

Страница 922: ...file deletion specification at transfer completion 25 0ms 35 0ms File deletion specification at transfer completion 1 0ms 25 0ms 35 0ms Number of points File transfer Collection interval at which data can be collected When the function memory is used When the SD memory card is used NZ1MEM 2GBSD NZ1MEM 4 8 16GBSD ...

Страница 923: ...92K points words and refresh data register 1024K points words Use File Register of Each Program is selected in the file register setting The number of program files is 10 Real time monitor function processing time This section shows the minimum value unit ms of monitor interval that allows monitoring under the following conditions without data loss during execution of the real time monitor functio...

Страница 924: ... 10000 Number of fields 64 The data type of the field is WORD 20 fields LREAL 20 fields WSTRING 124 characters 6 fields and BOOL 18 fields Main key Provided Functions that require access to files in the SD memory card except for the database function are not active Instruction Time taken to complete the execution of instruction Condition 1 Condition 2 Database import DBIMPORT 155s 255s Database ex...

Страница 925: ...the SD memory card except for the CPU module database access function are not active Number of records 10000 Number of fields 64 The data type of the field is specified as WORD 20 fields DOUBLE PRECISION 20 fields NLSCHAR UNICODE 124 characters 6 fields and BOOLEAN 18 fields Main key Provided Functions that require access to files in the SD memory card except for the CPU module database access fun...

Страница 926: ...is the processing time required to execute inactive blocks c Nonexistent block processing time Nonexistent block processing time coefficient Number of nonexistent blocks This is the system processing time required to execute blocks that have not been created d Active step processing time Active step processing time coefficient Number of active steps This is the time required to execute active step...

Страница 927: ... 3 97 Kn 0 41 Kp 0 32 When the SFC program capacity is the following models or conditions the processing time required to switch the SFC program from the standby status to the scan execution type will be fixed When the SFC information device is set the processing time required to switch the SFC program from the standby status to the scan execution type will become longer Constant Constant value R0...

Страница 928: ...g time for the constant scan is generated Item Increase in the scan time Reference Increase in the scan time of the CPU module in the control system Ts Ts Twr Tst Tca ms Twr Page 927 Waiting time for completion of the previous tracking data reflection Tst Page 927 Tracking data send time Tca Page 929 Waiting time for completion of tracking data reception Page 929 Other extended times Increase in t...

Страница 929: ...ndard safety and refresh data register RD D5 Size word of tracking data of global devices standard safety local devices standard safety global labels standard safety local labels standard safety and standard safety shared labels D6 Number of tracking transfer settings of global devices standard D7 Total size word of tracking data in the system data safety 1 signal flow memory safety local devices ...

Страница 930: ...of programs where local devices are set to use in the Setting of Device File Use Or Not window of the program setting of the CPU parameter Item Size 2 Global device other than the refresh data register RD Follows the tracking transfer settings Page 460 Tracking transfer setting Local device Total size of local devices of the device label memory area detailed setting the number of programs on the p...

Страница 931: ...ontrol system CPU module receives a receive completion notification until next time it receives the notification and 2 the period when the standby system CPU module sends a receive completion notification until it starts receiving tracking data When 1 2 0 ms When 1 2 1 2 ms Ex When CTRL is a control system execution program and MAIN is a program executed in both systems 1 If the constant scan is u...

Страница 932: ...efer to the following Page 927 Tracking data send time Extended time required for detecting a system switching cause The following describes the extended time required from occurrence of a system switching cause for the CPU module or redundant function module in the control system to the detection of a system switching request or the extended time required for the CPU module to detect a system swi...

Страница 933: ...ndby system scan time is 19 26ms or shorter 1 0 517ms 0ms Process CPU redundant mode 1ms SIL2 Process CPU 4ms The following time is added according to the parameter setting When the signal flow memory is tracked 0ms When the signal flow memory is not tracked 2ms CPU module failure Base unit failure 3 CPU module stop error major Redundant function module failure 3 When the standby system scan time ...

Страница 934: ...l flow memory and refresh data register RD D2 Size word of tracking data of global devices local devices global labels and local labels D4 Size word of tracking data in the system data signal flow memory standard safety and refresh data register RD D5 Size word of tracking data of global devices standard safety local devices standard safety global labels standard safety local labels standard safet...

Страница 935: ...D memory card of the standby system CPU module has been formatted Data in the SD memory card is mismatched between the control system and standby system Memory copy time depends on the data to be copied and the use of the SD memory card Use the time above as a rough standard for memory copy Item Calculation formula Normal value Tso Msw or Lsw Tsc 1 5 TM 4 5 RM Tsio ms Maximum value Tso Msw or Lsw ...

Страница 936: ... Setting at refresh END 0304H CPU Buffer Memory Setting at execution of refresh I45 0308H PLC Unit Data 0309H Fixed Scan Communication Function Fixed Scan Communication Area Setting 0307H Fixed Scan Communication Setting Fixed Scan Interval Setting of Fixed Scan Communication 0306H Fixed Scan Communication Function and Inter module Synchronization Function 0306H Operation Mode Setting Stop Setting...

Страница 937: ...RAM Cassette 3404H Battery less Option Cassette Setting 340CH Device Label Memory Area Setting Device Label Memory Area Capacity Setting 3400H Device Points 3401H Local Device 3405H Latch Range Setting 3407H Latch Type Setting of Latch Type Label 3408H Index Register Setting 3402H Refresh Memory Setting 3403H Device Latch Interval Setting 3406H Pointer Setting 340BH Internal Buffer Capacity Settin...

Страница 938: ... Setting 3C00H Output Mode at Block Stop Setting 3C00H Redundant System Settings Redundant Behavior Setting 5000H Tracking Setting Signal Flow Memory Tracking Setting 5001H Tracking Device Label Setting 5001H Safety Tracking Setting 5A30H Item Parameter No CC Link IEF Basic Setting Network Configuration Settings 7A00H Refresh Settings 7420H Item Parameter No Application settings Built in Database ...

Страница 939: ...s accessed by programs When read write is performed to the relevant files during execution of a program file inconsistency may occur Therefore such operation is performed during the END processing Functions to perform write to devices labels When write is performed to devices labels during execution of a program the result of operation processing may become inconsistent Therefore such operation is...

Страница 940: ...a function of the scan time Ex When Scan time ratio 10 is set Function Writing data to the programmable controller File register file Device data Local device also included Global label and local label data Reading data from the programmable controller File register file Device data Local device also included Global label and local label data Device data storage file Monitor function Circuit monit...

Страница 941: ...fied device label access service processing ratio is exceeded the remaining requests are processed in the END processing of the next scan Also for scan which has the device label access service processing time shorter than 0 1ms it is assumed as The device label access service processing time per scan 0 1ms 3 Operations such as access to device which are synchronized with the program are processed...

Страница 942: ... by this setting because they are processed during the END processing If no request data for the device label access service processing exists the CPU module proceeds to the next scan without waiting for requests 1 Synchronization with program is unnecessary 2 Two requests are processed in one END processing independently of the requested processing time 1 2 2 First scan Second scan Third scan Con...

Страница 943: ...a single scan As a result it can reduce the response for the device label access service processing Ex When Execute END Processing between Programs is enabled 1 Synchronization with program is unnecessary 2 Requests for operations such as access to devices are processed between program executions and during the END processing 1 2 2 Control processing At program execution Communication processing R...

Страница 944: ...ram debugging Before writing the program restoration information to a CPU module with no program restoration information by using the online change select Write in Background in the following option Tool Options Convert Online Program Change Operational Setting Write Program Restore Information Checking the program restoration information write status The write status of the program restoration in...

Страница 945: ...mation is not written when the external input output forced on off function is executed in registration when the device tests with execution conditions are registered Same priority Low Functions set in Function to use FUNCTION LED of LED Display Setting such as the data logging function Page 131 LED display setting 1 Check that SM386 Program restoration information write status LED control setting...

Страница 946: ...ed for the write destination If online change is executed during boot operation with No being selected in Program Restore Information the change is not reflected in a program in the transfer source SD memory card 1 Check that SM386 Program restoration information write status LED control setting mode is turned on without LED flashing 2 Set AFA0H to SD384 System operation setting 3 Turn off and on ...

Страница 947: ...odule can be used with CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool of the supported version listed in the table below or any later version Compatible OS For details on the OSs supported by CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool refer to following manual which is stored in the installer CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool GX LogViewer Installation Instructions BCN P5999 0506 Operating environment of CPU...

Страница 948: ...nication route To connect the CPU module to a personal computer use the following methods Page 984 Transfer setup Connection through a USB port Use a USB cable The following types of USB cables can be used USB cable USB A type USB miniB type USB cable USB B type USB miniB type Only one CPU module can be connected to the same personal computer simultaneously The following connection configurations ...

Страница 949: ...s disabled review the settings of the CPU module and personal computer Ex When all the bits of the CPU module side IP address that correspond to 0 part of the personal computer side subnet mask are on or off CPU module side IP address 64 64 255 255 Personal computer side IP address 64 64 1 1 Personal computer side subnet mask 255 255 0 0 Ex When all the bits of the CPU module side IP address that ...

Страница 950: ...cation and step No specification is enabled Trigger logging range Number of records specified before and after the trigger establishment Number of trigger establishments number of events that can be handled as trigger one Number of records SD memory card Maximum of 1000000 CPU built in memory function memory Maximum of 50000 File output File name Additional information plus file number File storag...

Страница 951: ... and other devices 3 To remove unnecessary folders use the following methods Use a personal computer Logging file operation Page 990 Logging file operation Operation settings when entering into RUN mode This function sets data logging operations when entering into RUN mode after the data logging setting is registered Data logging file transfer function This function automatically transfers data lo...

Страница 952: ...imiter Tab Return code CRLF 0x0D 0x0A Character code Unicode Character encoding schema UTF 16 Little Endian Field data Not enclosed by double quotation marks Double quotation marks and commas cannot be used in each data 1 LOGGING LOG01 DATETIME YYYY MM DD hh mm ss sss TIME UTC 09 00 2014 10 01 12 01 00 000 2014 10 01 12 02 00 000 2014 10 01 12 03 00 000 2014 10 01 12 04 00 000 2014 10 01 12 05 00 ...

Страница 953: ...Module Logging Configuration Tool is 1 76E or earlier or the version is 1 82L or later and only global devices are specified RCPU_1 is displayed in the file version which shows the model information 12 bytes No for data type information row Numerical value indicating the position of the data type information row from the top of the file is placed 2 bytes No for data name row Numerical value indica...

Страница 954: ...mation output content Size Date column DATETIME 16 bytes Format is output YYYY MM DD hh mm ss sss 6 to 68 bytes Data collection interval column INTERVAL 16 bytes No additional information 0 byte Execution step No column STEP NO 16 bytes Execution program number column PROGRAM NO 22 bytes Execution program name column PROGRAM NAME 24 bytes Index column INDEX 10 bytes Data column Bit type BIT 6 byte...

Страница 955: ...re set to be output Date the output format is YYYY MM DD hh mm ss sss Data sampling interval Execution step No Execution program name or execution program No Index and Device comment output only for devices from D200 to D227 0 date column 0 data collection interval column 0 execution step number column 0 execution program number column 0 execution program name column 0 index column 0 100 14 28 dat...

Страница 956: ...tion timing or the FB program is in running 0 is output 2 to 12 bytes Execution program number column The program No executed on the engineering tool at the time interval and timing in which data was collected is output With the collection condition Each scanning cycle specified the resulting output is the program number of the last executed program in the scan If two or more system operations suc...

Страница 957: ...selected 9 Data information size 2 bytes 10 Data type 2 bytes 11 Output type 2 bytes 12 Data information setting 2 bytes 13 Data length 2 bytes 14 Data name length 2 bytes 31 Program name Program name length bytes 15 Data name Data name length bytes 16 Device comment name length 2 bytes 17 Device comment name Device comment name length bytes 29 Device code 16 bytes 30 Program name length 2 bytes 2...

Страница 958: ...n be selected 9 Data information size 2 bytes 10 Data type 2 bytes 11 Output type 2 bytes 12 Data information setting 2 bytes 13 Data length 2 bytes 14 Data name length 2 bytes 15 Data name Data name length bytes 16 Device comment name length 2 bytes 17 Device comment name Device comment name length bytes 20 Date data 8 bytes 18 Record start flag FFFFH 2 bytes 19 Record data length 2 bytes 21 Data...

Страница 959: ...ger flag b5 1 Output index 0 Do not output index b6 1 Output device comments 0 Do not output device comments b7 1 Output comments 0 Do not output comments b9 1 Output device comments for each program 0 Do not output device comments for each program 2 6 Comment size The comment length of 7 Comment is output 2 7 Comment The comment specified in the setting is output in Unicode 2 to 512 8 Number of c...

Страница 960: ...d at the time interval and timing in which data was collected is output If the same program number or program name has already been in the file 0 is output 2 25 Program name The program name no extension that is executed at the time interval and timing in which data was collected is output in Unicode With the collection condition Each scanning cycle specified the resulting output is the program na...

Страница 961: ... value falls below the lower limit of the negative value Inf is output When the value is between the upper limit of the negative value and the lower limit of the positive value 0 is output Output format Lower limit Upper limit Word unsigned 0 65535 Word signed 32768 32767 Double word unsigned 0 4294967295 Double word signed 2147483648 2147483647 Output format Negative value Positive value Lower li...

Страница 962: ...CPU module to RUN state to start the data logging Page 988 Logging status and operation 10 Stop the data logging and read the data logging file Page 990 Logging file operation 11 Check the file into which data has been read For details on installation and uninstallation procedures of CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool refer to the following CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool GX LogViewer Ins...

Страница 963: ...ste Setting Item Paste the setting with a table format Paste device label copied in other application software Paste a device label which is copied in another application into a line selected Existing data in the line are overwritten and erased Insert Copied Setting Item Paste the copied setting with a table format Insert device label copied in other application software Paste a device label which...

Страница 964: ...D memory card Creating new project Create a new project Project New Window Displayed items Opening project Open a stored project file Project Open Saving project Overwriting Overwrite an edited project to the file and saves it Project Save Saving with a new file name Save an edited project with a new file name Project Save As Item Description PLC series Select RCPU ...

Страница 965: ...Open the following window Project Read Logging Setting from Memory Card SD 3 Select the drive from which data is read and data to be read 4 Click the Read button Window Displayed items Any existing data data logging setting with the same setting number or common setting on the target is overwritten The PLC series of the setting data in the SD memory card must be RCPU Item Description Drive to read...

Страница 966: ...a logging starts Page 204 Auto Logging Operating procedure 1 Attach an SD memory card to the personal computer 2 Open the following window Project Write Logging Setting into Memory Card SD 3 Select the drive to which data is written and data to be written 4 Click the Write button Window Displayed items Any existing data data logging setting with the same setting number or common setting on the tar...

Страница 967: ...o import a project of the engineering tool which is the read source for the label Window Displayed items Item Description Read Source Project Path The full path of the read source project is displayed When no project is read this field is blank Edit button Clicking this button displays the Open window Select a read source project ...

Страница 968: ...d items Item Description Setting range Default Logging type Select the logging type Continuous logging Trigger logging Continuous logging Logging target Device Select this item when using a device as the target data specified in the Sampling Data and Trigger settings Checked Label Select this item when using a label as the target data specified in the Sampling Data and Trigger settings Not checked...

Страница 969: ... the next END processing after the specified time has elapsed Select this checkbox to collect data at a timing when the first END processing is done after the specified time interval is elapsed Checked Interrupt occurrence Interrupt pointer Select the interrupt cycle I28 Interrupt by internal timer I29 Interrupt by internal timer I30 Interrupt by internal timer I31 Interrupt by internal timer I44 ...

Страница 970: ...ified device condition has been satisfied If both the step No and device are specified as conditions the data is collected when the both conditions are satisfied Page 175 Device label specification Checked 3 Label specification 2 Specify this item for collecting data at the END processing where the specified label condition has been satisfied If both the step No and label are specified as conditio...

Страница 971: ...ication such as Watch window of GX Works3 or GX Works2 a spreadsheet or a text editor use Paste device label copied in other application software or Insert device label copied in other application software Page 971 Pasting Inserting a device or label copied in another application To insert a block of data into the data list all at once use Batch Data Insertion Page 972 Batch insertion of data Wind...

Страница 972: ... name Example label_w1 For the label of timer type retentive timer type counter type specify the element name S contact C coil N current value Example label_w1 S When setting a local label Input Program block name Label name Example ProgPou label_w1 For the label of timer type retentive timer type counter type specify the element name S contact C coil N current value Example ProgPou label_w1 S Whe...

Страница 973: ...rtcut is valid only when the Head column under Device or Label column is selected Processing details The following table summarizes the operation details of the functions 1 From the start to the newline or the first tab of strings in each line on the clipboard are pasted or inserted 2 If a copied string is invalid as a device label it cannot be pasted or inserted Item Operation Paste device label ...

Страница 974: ...Specify the start device number In this field only global devices can be input Local devices cannot be input Page 171 Data to be collected Last In this field the end device number calculated based on the data type and size is displayed Data type Select a type of the data to be inserted at once Page 171 Data type Size Specify the data size when the data type is set to String or Raw 1 to 256 bytes O...

Страница 975: ...change specification or Label change specification when Condition specification is selected is shown Item Description Setting range Default Condition specification Device change specification 1 Configure the trigger condition based on the device data condition Page 179 Device label change specification Checked 3 Label change specification 2 Configure the trigger condition based on the label data c...

Страница 976: ... Window Displayed items Item Description Setting range Default No of records before trigger Specify the number of records to be output as pre trigger record SD memory card 0 to 999999 Function memory 0 to 49999 1 No of records after trigger Specify the number of records to be logged during and after a trigger occurrence SD memory card 1 to 1000000 Function memory 1 to 50000 1 Total No of records V...

Страница 977: ...APPX Appendix 13 How to Use CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool 975 A Output The following window specifies the items to be output into the file Page 950 Data output type Window ...

Страница 978: ... Setting range Default Date Output date Add a time stamp to data for the data logging The date time format to be output can be specified by clicking the Set Date Line Format button 1 2 Checked Trigger information Output trigger information Add a mark to data items that are associated with a trigger occurrence for the data logging A character string to be added to the data where a trigger has occur...

Страница 979: ...w to Use CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool 977 A Save The following window configures the storage destination of data logging files and the switching timing of storage files Page 190 Switching to a storage file Window ...

Страница 980: ...is possible that the scan time and or the device label access service processing time can be extended Item Description Setting range Default Logging file save setting File save destination Specify the storage folder for the data logging file 60 characters or less double byte character not allowed LOG setting No Folder to store file to be saved Select information to be added to the name of the fold...

Страница 981: ...e CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool 979 A File transfer The following window specifies the destination when data logging files are sent to the FTP server Page 194 Data Logging File Transfer Auto Transfer to FTP Server Window ...

Страница 982: ...to 64 single byte characters alphanumeric characters and special characters 1 without a space and Data Transfer Mode Specify the FTP data transfer mode Generally specify the PORT mode If communications between the CPU module and the FTP server allow only the PASV mode due to Windows firewall specify the PASV mode PORT Mode Normal PASV Mode PORT Mode Normal File Transfer Test button Execute the fil...

Страница 983: ...e is switched to RUN state Page 205 Behavior of auto logging at the time of a transition to RUN Window Displayed items Item Description Setting range Default Operation at transition to RUN Select the operation when the operating status of the CPU module is switched to RUN state Page 203 Setting Behavior at the Time of Transition to RUN Auto Start Start by User Operation Auto Start ...

Страница 984: ...the data memory can be checked in Online Data Operation of the engineering tool GX Works3 Operating Manual Item Description Setting range Default Data logging name 1 Give the data logging setting being configured a name 32 characters or less LOG setting No Total Size of Output Logging Files 2 View the total capacity of the data logging file which is output based on the specified settings The total...

Страница 985: ...efault Enable the auto logging function Select this item to use auto logging Not checked Auto logging terminate condition Data logging stop Select the condition to complete the auto logging operation Page 204 Conditions for auto logging completion When all data loggings stop When any of the data loggings stops When all data loggings stop Timer Complete with timer Select this checkbox to stop the a...

Страница 986: ...sed when connecting via a hub Communication Time Check Specify the communication time Retry Count Specify the number of retries Connect to RnPCPU Redundant Mode Select this item when the Process CPU redundant mode is connected and select a connection target system 1 Note that the connection target system will not change even though a system switching is performed To change the connection target sy...

Страница 987: ...mory where the data to be read is stored from the Target Memory list 3 Select the checkbox corresponding to the data item to be read in the Target logging setting data list and click the Read button Window Displayed items Any existing data data logging setting with the same setting number or common setting on the target is overwritten Item Description Target Memory Select the memory where the data...

Страница 988: ...up mode of the Process CPU redundant mode data can be written to both systems or one of the systems Click the Write button and a window appears Select whether or not to write data to both systems 2 The data logging setting using the function memory as the data storage destination memory cannot be written to the SD memory card Therefore the setting is not displayed when Memory card SD is selected f...

Страница 989: ...ing window Online Delete Logging Setting 2 Select the memory where the data to be deleted is stored from the Target Memory list 3 Select the checkbox corresponding to the data item to be deleted in the Target logging setting data list and click the Delete button Window Displayed items Item Description Target Memory Select the memory where the data to be deleted is stored Target logging setting dat...

Страница 990: ... any of the following operations is performed Powering off and on Reset Changing the operating status from STOP to RUN 5 To suspend the data logging click the Pause button and to stop the data logging click the Stop button when multiple items are selected they are executed simultaneously The data logging cannot be started even when writing the setting and powering off and on or resetting the CPU m...

Страница 991: ...ry used for this operation 1 Select All button Select all the checkboxes in the setting data list Select None button Clear all the checkboxes in the setting data list Update button Update monitoring status Target Select the target setting data for this operation one or more numbers can be selected button Clicking this button when an error occurs displays the error details window Logging operation ...

Страница 992: ...ting the following operations may result in delay of other monitor update because a certain time period is required for saving data logging files When saving data logging files during the data logging execution When saving a large data logging file Window Displayed items Item Description Target Memory Select the memory to be displayed Directory View the path to the displayed folder To change the f...

Страница 993: ...the IP address is displayed When the FTP server is specified with a server name both of the IP address and server name are displayed 1 Transfer Status The transfer status of the data logging file is displayed The data logging file transfer setting is not set Stopped File transfer is stopped Retrying The file whose transfer failed is being transferred again Transferring Files are being transferred ...

Страница 994: ...he file transfer status is displayed Error Date The date when the data logging file transfer function error occurred is displayed Data Logging Setting No The data logging setting No where the data logging file transfer function error has occurred is displayed File Name The data logging file name where the data logging file transfer function error has occurred is displayed 1 File Transfer Server Th...

Страница 995: ...al e Manual Viewer opens and its manual is displayed Operating procedure Help Open Manual Connection to MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA Global Website Access Mitsubishi Electric Corporation FA site home page Operating procedure Help Connection to MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA Global Website Checking version information Check the version of CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool Operating procedure Help About Confi...

Страница 996: ...ejected or a message window appears in response to the improper entry 1 SP means a space Supported characters for file and or folder directory name Characters in the shaded area can be used Place where character is used Support status of the target character SP 1 Two byte characters Data Logging Setting Data logging name String for Indicating Trigger Occurrence Comment Date Line Output Format Logg...

Страница 997: ...or my approval or Warn Prompt me each time to choose an action and then install the USB driver Windows Vista Operating procedure 1 Connect a personal computer to the CPU module with a USB cable and power on the programmable controller 2 Select Locate and install driver software recommended on the Found New Hardware window 3 On the next window select Browse my computer for driver software advanced ...

Страница 998: ...xample the definition is 39 characters for fld3 NLSCHAR 120 of table1 in the application example 1 n indicates the number of characters DROP TABLE This command deletes the specified table in the database Application example To delete table 1 DROP TABLE table1 Syntax CREATE TABLE table name field name data type option field name data type option field name data type option Item Description Syntax P...

Страница 999: ...example To set the index idx1 to fld2 of table1 CREATE INDEX idx1 ON table1 fld2 DROP INDEX This command deletes the specified index in the database Application example To delete the idx1 index in table1 DROP INDEX idx1 ON table1 EMPTY TABLE This command deletes all records of the specified table in the database Application example To delete all records in table1 EMPTY table1 Syntax CREATE INDEX i...

Страница 1000: ... all values SELECT output target field or numeric expression FROM table name option To output a value excluding overlapped values SELECT DISTINCT output target field or numeric expression FROM table name option 1 option 2 Item Description Syntax INNER JOIN Performs inner join Records that exist in the specified both tables are output SELECT output target field or numeric expression FROM table name...

Страница 1001: ...command deletes a record of the specified table in the database 1 When the field value is a character string enclose it in single quotation marks Option Application example To delete all records in table1 DELETE table1 To delete the record of the fld3 value abc in table1 DELETE table1 WHERE fld3 abc Syntax 1 UPDATE table name SET field name assigned value field name assigned value field name assig...

Страница 1002: ...ECT SUM fld2 FROM table1 GROUP BY fld1 HAVING SUM fld2 50 Syntax To specify a condition WHERE condition To specify an exception WHERE NOT condition To specify two conditions with AND WHERE condition 1 AND condition 2 To specify two conditions with OR WHERE condition 1 OR condition 2 Item Description Syntax Equals numeric expression 1 numeric expression 2 Not equal to numeric expression 1 numeric e...

Страница 1003: ... A ORDER BY This command sorts output Application example To sort and output fld1 and fld2 of all records in ascending order of the fld1 value from table1 SELECT fld1 fld2 FROM table1 ORDER BY fld1 ASC Syntax Ascending ORDER BY numeric expression ASC Descending ORDER BY numeric expression DESC ...

Страница 1004: ...e number of records of fld1 from table1 excluding overlapped values SELECT COUNT DISTINCT fld1 FROM table1 MAX This command obtains a maximum value Application example To obtain the maximum value of fld1 from table1 SELECT MAX fld1 FROM table1 MIN This command obtains a minimum value Application example To obtain the minimum value of fld1 from table1 SELECT MIN fld1 FROM table1 SUM This command ob...

Страница 1005: ...and obtains an arc sine Application example To obtain the arc sine of fld1 from table1 SELECT ASIN fld1 FROM table1 ATAN This command obtains an arc tangent Application example To obtain the arc tangent of fld1 from table1 SELECT ATAN fld1 FROM table1 ATAN2 This command obtains an arc tangent 1 This syntax is ATAN2 y x Application example To obtain an arc tangent of fld1 fld2 from table1 SELECT AT...

Страница 1006: ...fld1 FROM table1 COT This command obtains a cotangent Application example To obtain the cotangent of fld1 from table1 SELECT COT fld1 FROM table1 DEGREES This command obtains degrees from radians Application example To obtain degrees of fld1 from table1 SELECT DEGREES fld1 FROM table1 EXP This command obtains an exponent value It calculates e raised to the power of numeric expression Application e...

Страница 1007: ... table1 SELECT POW fld1 fld2 FROM table1 RADIANS This command obtains radians from degrees Application example To obtain radians of fld1 from table1 SELECT RADIANS fld1 FROM table1 ROUND This command rounds a value The value of numeric expression 1 is rounded off to the nth decimal place 1 1 Add one to the value specified in n numeric expression 2 Application example To obtain the value of fld1 ro...

Страница 1008: ...n example To obtain the sine of fld1 from table1 SELECT SIN fld1 FROM table1 SQRT This command obtains a square root Application example To obtain the square root of fld1 from table1 SELECT SQRT fld1 FROM table1 TAN This command obtains a tangent Application example To obtain the tangent of fld1 from table1 SELECT TAN fld1 FROM table1 Syntax SIGN numeric expression Syntax SIN numeric expression Sy...

Страница 1009: ...APPX Appendix 14 List of Available SQL Commands for CPU Module Database Access Function 1007 A MEMO ...

Страница 1010: ...g Manual CC Link IE Controller Network function of the RJ71EN71 F S 1 040S F 06 S 1 005F MELSEC iQ R Ethernet CC Link IE User s Manual Startup MELSEC iQ R CC Link IE Controller Network User s Manual Application Mounting of MELSEC iQ R series modules occupying two slots F S 1 040S F 08 S F S 1 007H F S 1 040S F S 1 015R For the applicable modules refer to the following MELSEC iQ R Module Configurat...

Страница 1011: ... S 1 025B F S 1 040S MELSEC iQ R Module Configuration Manual Label initialization function F 04 S 1 025B F S 1 040S Page 322 LABEL INITIALIZATION FUNCTION Firmware update function F 1 S For RnCPU F 23 S For RnENCPU F 38 S MELSEC iQ R Module Configuration Manual External input output forced on off function F S 1 040S F 25 S 1 030G F 15 S 1 045X Page 150 External Input Output Forced On Off Function ...

Страница 1012: ... logout time change of the user authentication function 5 minutes 60 minutes F S F 04 S Safety communication function using the simple motion module 8 F 07 S 1 030G MELSEC iQ R Simple Motion Module User s Manual Application Error detection invalidation setting F 05 S F 35 S F 14 S Page 132 Error detection invalidation setting Local device and label specification for target data condition specifica...

Страница 1013: ...estored by using programs special relay and special register 6 This function is not supported in redundant mode 7 Support of the program restoration information write selection of writing to the programmable controller while the Process CPU is stopped and of the file batch online change is as follows F 13 S 1 040S 8 The firmware version of the Simple Motion Module is Ver 05 or later 9 Only the sta...

Страница 1014: ...1012 APPX Appendix 15 Added and Enhanced Functions MEMO ...

Страница 1015: ...a type 374 375 376 Database 232 Database function 232 Debug function 221 Decimal 401 Decimal constant K 401 Device 34 Device assignment 372 Device initial value 397 Device supporting iQSS 34 Device label access service processing 43 Device label memory 94 DINT 374 Double word signed 374 Double word unsigned bit string 32 bits 374 Double precision real number 374 402 DWORD 374 E Edge relay V 337 EN...

Страница 1016: ...ol instructions 360 Maximum counting speed for counters 346 Memory card parameters 936 Memory configuration 92 Memory copy 468 637 Memory dump file 226 Memory dump status 227 Missing data 193 Module access device 351 Module communication test 487 654 Module label 34 372 Module label assignment area 359 Momentary power failure 91 Monitor function 148 Multiple CPU synchronous interrupt 316 Multiple ...

Страница 1017: ...ister 554 675 Safety special relay 554 675 Safety system device 675 Safety system devices 554 557 679 Safety timer 554 556 675 677 Safety user device 675 676 Safety user devices 554 555 Saving restoring of the file register R block number 78 Saving restoring of the index register Z LZ 79 Scan execution type program 54 Scan monitoring function 125 Scan time 40 Scan time monitoring time 125 Scan tim...

Страница 1018: ...ger condition 179 Trigger instruction 181 Trigger logging 178 Troubleshooting by symptom 798 U Underflow 402 Unicode 374 Unicode text file 237 User authentication function 318 User device 333 W Watchdog timer 125 WORD 374 Word signed 374 Word unsigned bit string 16 bits 374 Writing data to the CPU module 115 WSTRING 374 ...

Страница 1019: ...ODUCT INTRODUCTION TERMS Section 14 4 Chapter 28 Section 29 1 29 2 PART 4 Chapter32 33 34 35 Appendix 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 13 WARRANTY August 2015 SH NA 081264ENG H Added or modified parts TERMS Section 1 5 1 6 4 3 7 1 14 2 14 3 14 4 21 2 24 1 26 2 27 4 Chapter 28 Section 29 1 29 2 31 3 32 2 32 4 33 4 Chapter 34 Section 34 2 34 6 34 9 35 1 Appendix 1 4 5 8 10 13 WARRANTY January 2016 SH NA 0812...

Страница 1020: ...22 PART 6 Chapter 35 36 37 38 39 40 Appendix 12 13 WARRANTY April 2018 SH NA 081264ENG P Added functions Data logging function for local devices labels error detection invalidation setting battery less option cassette online change SFC block Added or modified parts Section 1 3 3 1 3 3 6 2 Chapter 9 Section 9 1 Chapter 11 Section 11 1 11 2 11 3 11 16 21 19 Chapter 23 Section 28 14 Chapter 33 Sectio...

Страница 1021: ... been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fi...

Страница 1022: ... usually produces and retains sufficient spare parts for repairs of its Products for a period of seven 7 years after production is discontinued f MELCO generally announces discontinuation of Products through MELCO s Technical Bulletins Products discontinued and repair parts for them may not be available after their production is discontinued 2 Limits of Warranties a MELCO does not warrant or guara...

Страница 1023: ...personal injury wrongful death and or physical property damages as well as damages of a pecuniary nature the disclaimers and limitations contained in these terms shall apply to all three types of damages to the fullest extent permitted by law If however the personal injury wrongful death and or physical property damages cannot be disclaimed or limited by law or public policy to the extent provided...

Страница 1024: ...ELCO usually produces and retains sufficient spare parts for repairs of its Products for a period of seven 7 years after production is discontinued f MELCO generally announces discontinuation of Products through MELCO s Technical Bulletins Products discontinued and repair parts for them may not be available after their production is discontinued 2 Limits of Warranties a MELCO does not warrant or g...

Страница 1025: ...t of personal injury wrongful death and or physical property damages as well as damages of a pecuniary nature the disclaimers and limitations contained in these terms shall apply to all three types of damages to the fullest extent permitted by law If however the personal injury wrongful death and or physical property damages cannot be disclaimed or limited by law or public policy to the extent pro...

Страница 1026: ...ver Windows Vista and Windows XP are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries The company names system names and product names mentioned in this manual are either registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective companies In some cases trademark symbols such as or are not specified in this manual SH NA 081264ENG Q ...

Страница 1027: ......

Страница 1028: ...ithout notice When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 CHOME HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPAN ...

Результаты поиска

Содержание MELSEC iQ-R-R00CPU

Отзывы:

Бренды по названию

Популярные бренды

Mitsubishi Electric MELSEC iQ-R-R00CPU, Руководство пользователя

Результаты поиска

Содержание MELSEC iQ-R-R00CPU

Отзывы:

Бренды по названию

Популярные бренды